Download: LCD screen Mass (Approx.) NP-F330 battery pack

MVC-FD87/FD92 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model Level 2 AEP Model UK Model E Model Ver 1.1 2001. 06 Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Japanese Model PHoto: MVC-FD92 This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well. When the machine needs to be repaired, please refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of LCD. On the FC-85 board FC-85 board This service manual procides the information that is premised the Schematic diagram ... Page 4-15 to 4-38 circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the Printed wiring board ... Page 4-11 to 4-14 FC-85 ...
Author: Tucker Shared: 8/19/19
Downloads: 1685 Views: 3782

Content

MVC-FD87/FD92 SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model Level 2 AEP Model UK Model E Model Ver 1.1 2001. 06 Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Japanese Model

PHoto: MVC-FD92 This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well. When the machine needs to be repaired, please refer to page 7 to discriminate the type of LCD.

On the FC-85 board FC-85 board

This service manual procides the information that is premised the Schematic diagram ... Page 4-15 to 4-38 circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the Printed wiring board ... Page 4-11 to 4-14 FC-85 board. Electrical parts list ... Page 6-10 to 6-18 Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts list of the FC-85 board is not shown. The above-described information is shown in service manual The following pages are not shown. Level 3.

SPECIFICATIONS

System Data system Flash Image device FD92: Movie: MPEG Recommended recording FD92: 5 mm (1/3.6 type) color CCD Still: JPEG, GIF (in TEXT distance: FD87: 6.64 mm (1/2.7 type) color CCD mode, Clip Motion), TIFF 0.3 m to 2.5 m (11 7/8 inches Audio with still image: Lens to 8 1/3 feet)MPEG (Monaural) FD92: 8× zoom lens FD87: GIF (in TEXT mode) Input and Outputf = 4.75 – 38 mm (3/16 – 1 1/2 inches) Floppy disk: JPEG (JFIF) connector (FD92) (41 – 328 mm (1 5/8 – 13 inches) “Memory Stick”: JPEG A/V OUT (MONO) when converted into a 35 mm still (Exif2.1) (Monaural) camera) Recording medium Minijack Video: FD92: Floppy disk: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced,F = 2.8 – 3.0 FD87: 3× zoom lens 3.5 inch 2HD MS-DOS sync negative f = 6.1 – 18.3 mm (1/4 – 3/4 inches) format (1.44 MB) Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ (39 – 117 mm (1 9/16 – 4 5/8 inches) “Memory Stick” load) Output impedance: 2.2 kΩ when converted into a 35 mm still FD87: Floppy disk: camera) 3.5 inch 2HD MS-DOS ACC jack F = 2.8 – 2.9 format (1.44 MB) Minijack “Memory Stick” (When using with Exposure control USB jackthe MSAC-FD2M/FD2MA Floppy Automatic exposure mini-B Disk Adaptor for Memory Stick): White balance DCF format Automatic, Indoor, Outdoor, Hold – Continued on next page –

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

, LCD screen Mass (Approx.) NP-F330 battery pack LCD panel FD92: 660 g (1 lb 7 oz) (including Battery type TFT (Thin Film Transistor NP-F330 battery pack, Lithium ion active matrix) drive floppy disk and lens cap, etc.) Maximum output Total number of dots FD87: 630 g (1 lb 6 oz) (including voltage 123 200 (560×220) dots NP-F330 battery pack, DC 8.4 V floppy disk and lens cap, etc.) Mean output voltage General Built-in microphone (FD92) DC 7.2 V Application Electret condenser Sony battery pack NP-F330 microphone Capacity 5.0 Wh (700 mAh) (supplied)/F550 Built-in speaker (FD92) Operating temperature Power requirements Dynamic speaker 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) 8.4 V AC-L10A/L10B/L10C Dimensions (Approx.) Power consumption AC power adaptor 38.4 20.6 70.8 mm(During shooting) (1 9/16 13/16 2 7/8 inches) 3.5 W Power requirements 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz (w/h/d)Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) Rated output voltage Mass (Approx.) Storage temperature DC 8.4 V, 1.5 A in operating 70 g (2 oz) –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to mode Accessories +140°F) Operating temperature AC-L10A/L10B/L10C Dimensions (Approx.) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) AC power adaptor (1) FD92: 143×103×79 mm Storage temperature Power cord (mains lead) (1) (5 3/4×4 1/8×3 1/8 inches) –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F) USB cable (1) (FD92) (w/h/d) Dimensions (Approx.) NP-F330 battery pack (1) FD87: 143×103×75 mm 125×39×62 mm (5×1 9/16×2 1/2 inches) A/V connecting cable (1) (FD92) (5 3/4×4 1/8×3 inches) (w/h/d) Shoulder strap (1) (w/h/d) Mass (Approx.) Lens cap (1) 280 g (10 oz) Lens cap strap (1) CD-ROM (SPVD-004 USB Driver) (1) Operating instructions (1) Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK À LA SÉCURITÉ!0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COM- SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUB- POSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES LISHED BY SONY. NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-sol- 4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs dered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recom- splashes and bridges. mend their replacement. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. “pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transis- • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 ˚C tors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them during repairing. out to the customer and recommend their replacement. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when sol- dering or unsoldering. – 2 –, • Floppy disk that can be used by the MVC-FD87/FD92 • Size : 3.5-inch • Type : 2 HD • Capacity : 1.44 MB • Format : MS-DOS format (512 bytes × 18 sector) (FD can be formatted by the MVC-FD87/FD92) Table for differences of function Model MVC-FD87 MVC-FD92 Image device 1/2.7-inch CCD 1/3.6-inch CCD Lens38Digital zoom 6 16 Recording moving image – a Audio with still image – a MS socket – a Digital I/O (USB) – a CD board CD-318 CD-310 – 3 –,

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title Page Section Title Page SERVICE NOTE ... 6 5. ADJUSTMENTS Self-diagnosis Display ... 8 Before Starting Adjustment ... 5-1 1-1. Adjusting Items when Replacing 1. GENERAL Main Parts and Boards ... 5-2 5-1. Camera Section Adjustments ... 5-3 Introduction ... 1-1 1-1. Preparations Before Adjustment ... 5-3 Identifying the Parts ... 1-2 1-1-1. List of Service Tools ... 5-3 Preparing the Power Supply ... 1-2 1-1-2. Preparations ... 5-4 Setting the Date and Time ... 1-3 1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply ... 5-4 Inserting a Floppy Disk ... 1-4 1-1-4. Precautions ... 5-6 Inserting a “Memory Stick” ... 1-4 1. Setting the Switch ... 5-6 Recording Still Images ... 1-4 2. Order of Adjustments ... 5-6 Recording Moving Images ... 1-6 3. Subjects ... 5-6 Playing Back Still Images ... 1-6 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ... 5-7 Playing Back Moving Images ... 1-6 1-2. Initialization of B, D, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-8 Viewing Images Using a Computer ... 1-7 1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data ... 5-8 Image File Storage Destinations and Image File Names ... 1-8 1. Initializing D Page Data ... 5-8 Before Performing Advanced Operations ... 1-9 2. Modification of D Page Data ... 5-8 Various Recording ... 1-11 3. D Page Table ... 5-9 Various Playback ... 1-15 1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-10 Editing ... 1-16 1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-10 As an External Drive ... 1-18 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data ... 5-10 Additional Information ... 1-18 3. B Page Table ... 5-10 Troubleshooting ... 1-19 4. E Page Table ... 5-10 Warning and Notice Messages ... 1-21 5. F Page Table ... 5-11 Self-diagnosis Display ... 1-21 6. 7 Page Table ... 5-13 LCD Screen Indicators ... 1-21 1-3. Video System Adjustments ... 5-14 1. Video Sync Level Adjustment (FD92) ... 5-14 2. Video Burst Level Adjustment (FD92) ... 5-14 2. DISASSEMBLY 1-4. Camera System Adjustment ... 5-151. Hall Adjustment ... 5-16 2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using the Minipattern Box) .. 5-17 2-1. Cabinet (Rear) Block Assembly ... 2-1 3. Flange Back Adjustment (Using the Flange Back 2-2. FDD Block Assembly ... 2-1 Adjustment Chart Subject More than 500 m Away) ... 5-18 2-3. FC-85 Board ... 2-2 4. Flange Back Check ... 5-20 2-4. Lens Block Assembly ... 2-2 5. F No. Standard Data Input ... 5-20 2-5. PK-54 Board ... 2-3 6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ... 5-21 2-6. LCD Module ... 2-3 7. Picture Frame Setting ... 5-22 2-7. Circuit Boards Location ... 2-4 8. Light Level Adjustment and ND Shutter Check ... 5-23 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment ... 5-24 10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ... 5-24 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 11. Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation (FD92) .. 5-25 12. Auto White Balance Adjustment ... 5-26 3-1. Overall Block Diagram ... 3-1 13. Color Reproduction Adjustment ... 5-27 3-9. Power Block Diagram 1 ... 3-17 14. Color Reproduction Check ... 5-28 3-10. Power Block Diagram 2 ... 3-19 15. Auto White Balance Check ... 5-30 16. Strobe White Balance Adjustment ... 5-32 17. Strobe Light Level and White Balance Check ... 5-33 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND 18. CCD Black Defect Compensation ... 5-34 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 19. CCD White Defect Compensation ... 5-35 1-5. LCD System Adjustments ... 5-36 4-1. Frame Schematic Diagrams ... 4-3 1. LCD Initial Data Input ... 5-37 Frame Schematic Diagram (1/2) ... 4-3 2. VCO Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-38 Frame Schematic Diagram (2/2) ... 4-5 3. Black Limit Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-39 4-2. Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams ... 4-7 4. Bright Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-39 CD-310 Printed Wiring Board and 5. Contrast Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-40 Schematic Diagram ... 4-7 6. Color Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-40 CD-318 Printed Wiring Board and 7. VG Center Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-41 Schematic Diagram ... 4-9 8. V-COM Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-42 FU-152 Printed Wiring Board ... 4-39 9. White Balance Adjustment (FC-85 Board) ... 5-43 FU-152 Schematic Diagram... 4-41 1-6. System Control System Adjustments ... 5-44 PK-54 Printed Wiring Board ... 4-43 1. Battery Down Adjustment ... 5-44 PK-54 (MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT) 2. ZOOM Center Adjustment ... 5-45 Schematic Diagram ... 4-47 3. Alignment Check (FDD Unit) ... 5-45 PK-54 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) 5-2. Service Mode ... 5-46 Schematic Diagram ... 4-49 2-1. Adjusting Remote Commander ... 5-46 PK-54 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ... 4-51 1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander ... 5-46 4-3. Waveforms ... 4-53 2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting 4-4. Parts Location ... 4-56 Remote Commander ... 5-46 2-2. Data Process ... 5-47 2-3. Service Mode ... 5-48 1. Setting the Test Mode ... 5-48 2. Bit Value Discrimination ... 5-48 – 4 –, Section Title Page 3. Switch Check (1) ... 5-48 4. Switch Check (2) (FD92) ... 5-48 5. Switch Check (3) ... 5-49 6. LED Check ... 5-49 7. Self Diagnosis Code ... 5-49 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST 6-1. Exploded Views ... 6-1 6-1-1. Cabinet (Front) Section ... 6-1 6-1-2. Cabinet (Front) Assembly ... 6-2 6-1-3. FDD Block Section ... 6-3 6-1-4. Cabinet (Rear) Section ... 6-4 6-1-5. Cabinet (Rear) Assembly ... 6-5 6-1-6. Lens Block Section (FD87) ... 6-6 6-1-7. Lens Block Section (FD92) ... 6-7 6-2. Electrical Parts List ... 6-8 * The color reproduction frame is shown on page 137. – 5 –,

SERVICE NOTE

• NOTE FOR REPAIR When remove a connector, don’t pull at wire of connector. It is possible that a wire is snapped. Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of bent at the terminal. Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly. When installing a connector, don’t press down at wire of connector. It is possible that a wire is snapped. Cut and remove the part of gilt which comes off at the point. (Be careful or some pieces of gilt may be left inside) [Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor] Discharging the Capacitor Short-circuit between the positive and the negative terminals of The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds. maximum 300 V potential. There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the battery is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the R: 1 kΩ/1 W charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main (Part code: 1-215-869-11) power of the MVC-FD87/FD92 is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltage must be discharged as described below. Preparing the Short Jig To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11). Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to pre- Capacitor vent electrical shock. 1 kΩ/1 W Wrap insulating tape. – 6 –, [LCD type check] By measuring the resistor value between Pin qd of CN803 and Pin 4 of CN803 on FC-85 board, the type of LCD can be discrimi- nated. Note: About PK-54 board and LCD module, discriminate LCD type on the machine, and replace the same type. FC-85 board CN803 Resistor value LCD type PD board 10 kΩ TYPE SA PK-54 (TYPE SA) 22 kΩ TYPE ST PK-54 (TYPE ST) Volt ohm meter 22 qd pin 4 pin CPC cover FC-85 board CN803 CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) – 7 –, [Description on Self-diagnosis Display] Note : The “Self-diagnosis” data is backed up by the coin lithiumbattery. The data will be lost and initialized when the coin lithium battery is removed. Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error Change the disk and turn off the main C:32:01 Defective floppy disk. DRIVE ERROR power then back on. • The type of floppy disk that cannot be Replace the floppy disk or “Memory used by this machine, is inserted. Stick” (FD92). DISK ERROR (Such as 2DD) C:13:01 Format the floppy disk or “Memory MEMORY STICK ERROR • Data is damaged. Stick” (FD92) with the MVC-FD87/ (FD92) • Unformatted disk or “Memory Stick” FD92. (FD92) is inserted. Flash LED Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being E:91:01 *1 Flash display flash unit charged. Flashing at 3.2 Hz E:61:00 Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. — E61:10 Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash, unit. *1: When the flash charging failed, Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 04 are written. After repair, be sure to write Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 00. [Power supplying Method] Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L10A) when supplying the power to this set. – 8 –,

MVC-FD87/FD92 SECTION 1 This section is extracted from GENERAL MVC-FD92 instruction manual.

. Regulatory Information The supplied interface cable must be used If the plug supplied with this equipment has WARNING with the equipment in order to comply with a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the Declaration of Conformity the limits for a digital device pursuant to fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never To prevent fire or shock hazard, do Trade Name: SONY Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. use the plug without the fuse cover. If younot expose the unit to rain or Model No.: MVC-FD92 should lose the fuse cover, please contact moisture. Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. your nearest Sony service station. Address: 1 Sony Drive, Park For the Customers in the For the Customers in the Ridge, NJ, 07656 USA U.S.A. and Canada For the Customers in U.S.A. Telephone No.: 201-930-6972 DISPOSAL OF LITHIUM ION Germany This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC BATTERY. Directive:EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.92/ Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not LITHIUM ION BATTERY. 31/EEC DISPOSE OF PROPERLY. This equipment complies with the EMCcause harmful interference, and (2) this regulations when used under the following device must accept any interference received, You can return your unwanted lithium ion circumstances: including interference that may cause batteries to your nearest Sony Service • Residential area undesired operation. Center or Factory Service Center. • Business district • Light-industry district CAUTION Note: (This equipment complies with the EMC You are cautioned that any changes or In some areas the disposal of lithium ion standard regulations EN55022 Class B.) modifications not expressly approved batteries in household or business trash may in this manual could void your be prohibited. Attention This symbol is intended to authority to operate this equipment. For the Sony Service Center nearest you call The electromagnetic fields at the specific alert the user to the presence Note: 1-800-222-SONY (United States only) of uninsulated “dangerous frequencies may influence the picture andThis equipment has been tested and found to For the Sony Factory Service Center nearest voltage” within the sound of this camera.comply with the limits for a Class B digital you call 416-499-SONY (Canada only) product’s enclosure that device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC may be of sufficient Caution:Rules. These limits are designed to provide magnitude to constitute a Do not handle damaged or leaking lithiumreasonable protection against harmful risk of electric shock to ion battery.interference in a residential installation. This persons. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed For the Customers in Canada This symbol is intended to and used in accordance with the alert the user to the presence of important operating and instructions, may cause harmful interference

CAUTION

maintenance (servicing) to radio communications. However, there is TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT instructions in the literature no guarantee that interference will not occur USE THIS POLARIZED AC PLUG WITH accompanying the in a particular installation. If this equipment AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR does cause harmful interference to radio or OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES appliance. television reception, which can be CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT determined by turning the equipment off and BLADE EXPOSURE.If you have any questions about this product, you may call: on, the user is encouraged to try to correct Sony Customer Information Center the interference by one or more of the NOTICE FOR THE 1-800-222-SONY (7669) following measures: CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITED The number below is for the FCC related — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. KINGDOM matters only. — Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is — Connect the equipment into an outlet on fitted to this equipment for your safety and a circuit different from that to which the convenience. receiver is connected. — Consult the dealer or an experienced Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to radio/TV technician for help. be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or BSI to BS 1362, (i.e. marked with or mark) must be used. 2 3 Be sure to read the following Do not shake or strike the camera before using your camera In addition to malfunctions and inability torecord images, this may render the floppy Introduction Operating instructions disks or “Memory Stick”s unusable or Before operating the unit, please read this image data breakdown, damage or loss may Deletes undesired images right away, checking the image manual thoroughly, and retain it for future occur. after shooting reference. LCD screen, finder (only models The digital still camera is able to play back the image and delete it right away. As you read through this manual, buttons with a finder) and lens Recording still images: and settings on the camera are shown in • The LCD screen and the finder are page 18 capital letters. manufactured using extremely high- e.g. Press DISPLAY. Playing back still images:precision technology so over 99.99% of page 24 Trial recording the pixels are operational for effective use. Deleting images Before you record one-time events, you may However, there may be some tiny black (DELETE): page 64 want to make a trial recording to make sure points and/or bright points (white, red, that the camera is working correctly. blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder. No compensation for contents of These points are normal in the the recording manufacturing process and do not affect Captures images with your computer Contents of the recording cannot be the recording in any way. You can easily copy images onto your computer using a floppy disk or a “Memory compensated for if recording or playback is • Be careful when placing the camera near a Stick,” and view and modify images on your computer using application software. not made due to a malfunction of your window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen, the finder or the lens to direct Viewing images using acamera or recording medium, etc. sunlight for long periods may cause computer: page 27 Notes on image data compatibility malfunctions. of the “Memory Stick” • This camera conforms with the Design rule Do not get the camera wet for Camera File system universal standard When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or established by the JEITA (Japan Electrics under similar conditions, be careful not to and Information Technology Industries get the camera wet. If moisture Association). You cannot play back on condensation occurs, refer to page 72 and your camera still images recorded on other follow the instructions on how to remove it equipment (DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/ before using the camera. Records a moving picture with audio TRV900E, DSC-D700, DSC-D770) that Back up recommendation The digital still camera can record a moving picture with audio for maximum 60 seconds. does not conform with this universal Recording moving standard. (These models are not sold in To avoid the potential risk of data loss, some areas.) always copy (back up) data to a disk. images: page 23 • Playback of images recorded with your When the camera is used for long camera on other equipment and playback periods of images recorded or edited with other Note that the camera body may become hot. equipment on your camera are not guaranteed. Precaution on copyright Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the Selects the recording mode from various types of recordings copyright laws. according to your situation Creating Clip Motion Files: page 47 Recording still images for e-mail (E-MAIL): page 49 Adding audio files to still images (VOICE): page 50 Recording text documents (TEXT): page 51 Recording still images as uncompressed files (TIFF): page 52461-1, Getting started

Identifying the parts

qa See the pages in parentheses for details of operation. 1 7 Attaching the281shoulder strap 2 qs qd93qf 5 qg4 5 qh qa qj6 qk 6 qs78ql 9 w; A Self-timer lamp (22) G Lens 0 wa B Flash (22) H Built-in microphone Shutter button (18, 23) Do not touch while recording. A Photocell window for LCD K Hooks for strapC screen D Zoom lever (20) I Lens cap (supplied) L LCD screenThe LCD screen becomes brighter Photocell window for flash J ACC (Accessory) jack when exposed to sunlight. M Floppy disk slot (16)E Do not block while recording. K A/V OUT (MONO) jack (62) B VOLUME +/– buttons (26) N Access lamp (18, 19) F Tripod receptacle (bottom Audio output is monaural. C LCD BACKLIGHT switch (20) O DISK EJECT lever (16) surface) L DC IN cover/DC IN jack (10, 13) D PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector P Speaker Use a tripod with a screw length of (38) less than 6.5 mm (7/32 inch). You Q “Memory Stick” cover/ cannot firmly secure the camera to E POWER ON/OFF (CHG) “Memory Stick” slot (17) tripods having longer screws, and (Charge) lamp (10) R MS /FD (“Memory Stick”/floppy may damage the camera. F (Flash) button/ (Flash) disk) selector lamp (22) S Battery cover (9) G FOCUS button (53) T USB cover/USB jack (29) H PROGRAM AE button (54) U Control button (38) I DISPLAY button (21) J POWER switch (14) 7 8

Preparing the power supply Charging the battery pack

When the camera is turned on, you cannot charge the battery pack. Be sure to turn off

Installing the battery pack the power of the camera.

Your camera operates only with the NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (not supplied) “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack* (L series). See page 75 for more information about “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. 2 to DC IN jack11232AC-L10A/L10B/L10C 2 AC power adaptor Power cord (mains lead) 1 Open the battery cover. 3 Slide the battery cover in the direction of the arrow. Battery pack to a wall outlet (mains) 2 Install the battery pack. Insert the battery pack with the v mark facing toward the battery compartment as illustrated. 1 Insert the battery pack into your camera. 3 Close the battery cover. 2 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up. To remove the battery pack 3 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and Open the battery cover. Slide the battery eject lever rightward, and remove then to a wall outlet (mains). the battery pack. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp (orange) below the LCD screen lights up Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it. when charging begins. When the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp goes off, full charge is completed. After charging the battery pack Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camera. Battery eject lever Battery remaining indicator The LCD screen on the camera shows the remaining time for which you can still * What is “InfoLITHIUM”? record or play back images. “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange information such as battery This indication may not be entirely accurate depending on the conditions of use and consumption with compatible video equipment. “InfoLITHIUM” L series battery packs have the the operating environment. mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Charging at a room temperature of 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) is recommended. 9 10 1-2 Getting started Getting started, NP-F330 (supplied)/F550 (not supplied) battery pack STILL mode recording/playback when using “Memory Stick”s When you record images in an extremely cold location or using the LCD screen, the NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 operating time becomes short. When using the camera in an extremely cold location, place the battery pack in your pocket or other place to keep it warm, then insert the Battery life Number of Battery life Number of battery pack into the camera just before recording. When using a pocket heater, take (min.) images (min.) images care not to let the heater directly contact the battery. Continuous Approx. 80 Approx. 1600 Approx. 170 Approx. 3400 recording* Auto power-off function Continuous Approx. 100 Approx. 3000 Approx. 230 Approx. 6900 If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes during recording, the camera playback** turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery pack. To use the camera again, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the camera again. Approximate battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back at a temperature of 25°C (77°F) with a fully charged battery pack, 640×480 image size Note on the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp during charging and in NORMAL recording mode. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp may flash: ∗ Recording at about 5-second intervals when using a floppy disk, or at about 3-second intervals • When a malfunction occurs in the battery pack. when using a “Memory Stick” The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp does not light up: ∗∗ Playing back single images continuously at about 2-second intervals • When the battery pack is not installed properly. MOVIE mode recording when using floppy disks Charging time NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.) Battery pack Full charge (min.) Continuous recording Approx. 85 Approx. 180 NP-F330 (supplied) Approx. 150 NP-F550 Approx. 210 MOVIE mode recording when using “Memory Stick”s Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack at a temperature of NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 25°C (77°F). Battery life (min.) Battery life (min.) Continuous recording Approx. 90 Approx. 190 Battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back Approximate time that can be recorded at a temperature of 25°C (77°F) and 160×112 image size with a fully charged battery pack. STILL mode recording/playback when using floppy disks NP-F330 (supplied) NP-F550 Notes • The battery life and number of images will be decreased when using at low temperature, using Battery life Number of Battery life Number of the flash, turning the power on/off frequently, or using the zoom. (min.) images (min.) images • The capacity of the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” is limited. The above figures are as a guide when you continuously record/play back by replacing the floppy disk or “Memory Stick.” Continuous Approx. 70 Approx. 750 Approx. 150 Approx. 1600 • If sufficient battery remaining time is indicated but the power runs out soon, fully charge the recording* battery so that the correct battery remaining time appears. Continuous Approx. 80 Approx. 2200 Approx. 170 Approx. 4800 • Do not short the DC plug of the AC power adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a playback** malfunction. 11 12

Using the AC power adaptor Setting the date and time

When you first use your camera, set the date and time. If these are not set, the CLOCK SET screen appears whenever you turn on your camera. 1 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor to DC IN jack Control button Power cord (mains lead) POWER ON/OFF (CHG) lamp to a wall outlet (mains) 1 Slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power. The POWER ON/OFF (CHG) (green) lamp lights up. 1 Open the DC IN cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack of your camera with the v mark facing up. 2 Press v on the control button. The menu bar appears on the LCD screen. 2 Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor and then to a wall outlet (mains). Using a car battery EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF Use Sony DC adaptor/charger. Select [SETUP] with B on the control button, Using your camera abroad 3 then press the center z. For details, see page 74. VIDEO OUT /LANGUAGE CLOCK SET When using the AC power adaptor BEEPLCD BRIGHT Be sure to use it near a wall outlet. If a malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug from EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP SELECT CLOSE the wall outlet. 4 Select [CLOCK SET] with v/V on the control button, then press the center z. VIDEO OUT CLOCK SET Y/M/D /LANGUAGE200111M/D/Y CLOCK SET 12:0 0:00AM D/M/Y

BEEP ENTER

LCD BRIGHT 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM

CANCEL

EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP SELECT OK SELECT OK 13 14 1-3 Getting started Getting started, 5 Select the desired date display format with Inserting a floppy disk v/V on the control button, then press the center z. CLOCK SET Y/M/D Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] M/D/YD/M/Y (month/day/year), or [D/M/Y] (day/month/year). 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER 2

CANCEL

SELECT/ADJUST OK 6 Select the year, month, day, hour or minute item you want to set with b/B on the control button. CLOCK SET Y/M/D The item to be set is indicated with v/V. M/D/Y D/M/Y 2001 / 1 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER EJECT lock DISK EJECT lever 1

CANCEL

SELECT/ADJUST OK 7 Set the numeric value with v/ on the 1 Check that the write protect tab is set to the recordable position for

V

control button, then press the center to recording.z enter it. Recordable/erasable CLOCK SET Y/M/D After entering the number, v/V moves to the next M/D/Y D/M/Y item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step5, set the 2001 / 7 / 1 12 : 00 AM ENTER Unrecordable/unerasable time on a 24-hour cycle. CANCEL SELECT/ADJUST OK 8 Select [ENTER] with B on the control button, then press the center z at the desired moment to begin clock movement. 2 Insert the floppy disk until it clicks.CLOCK SET Y/M/D The date and time are entered. M/D/YD/M/Y 2001 / 7 / 4 10 : 30 PM ENTER CANCEL Usable floppy disks SELECT OK • Size: 3.5 inch • Type: 2HD (1.44 MB) To cancel the date and time setting • Format: MS-DOS format (512 bytes × 18 sectors) Select [CANCEL] with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. Notes • Do not insert the media other than the floppy disks described above. • You cannot use the optional MSAC-FD2M/FD2MA Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory Stick. • Never remove the floppy disk, turn off the power, or change the position of the MS/FD selector while the access lamp is lit up. Removing the floppy disk While sliding the EJECT lock to the left, slide down the DISK EJECT lever. 15 16

Basic operations B Recording Inserting a “Memory Stick” Recording still images

Still images are recorded in JPEG format. To record still images, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power and123insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick.” 1 2 3, 4 1 Open the “Memory Stick” cover. Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow. Access lamp 2 Insert the “Memory Stick.” Insert the “Memory Stick” with the B mark facing toward the “Memory Stick” 1 2 slot as illustrated until it clicks. 3 Close the “Memory Stick” cover. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL. 2 Select the recording media using the MS/FD selector. Removing the “Memory Stick” MS: When recording on the “Memory Stick.” Open the “Memory Stick” cover, then push the “Memory Stick” once lightly. FD: When recording on the floppy disk. Notes 3 Press and hold the shutter button halfway down. • If you do not insert the “Memory Stick” firmly until it clicks, a message such as “MEMORY The beeps sound and the image is frozen. However, the image has not been STICK ERROR” will be displayed. recorded yet. While the AE lock indicator z is flashing, the camera • Never remove the “Memory Stick,” turn off the power, or change the position of the MS/FD automatically adjusts the exposure and focus of the captured image. When the selector while the access lamp is lit up. camera finishes the automatic adjustments, the AE lock indicator z stops • You cannot record or edit images on a “Memory Stick” if the write-protect switch is set to the flashing, then lights up, and the camera is ready for recording. LOCK position. If you release the shutter button, the recording will be canceled. Terminal AE lock indicator (green) flashes t lights up Write-protect

LOCK

switch Label space The position or shape of the write-protect switch depends on the type of the “Memory Stick.” “Memory Stick” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. 17 18 1-4 Getting started Getting started, 4 Press the shutter button fully down. Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen The shutter clicks. “RECORDING” appears on the LCD screen, and the image will be recorded on the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick.” When “RECORDING” disappears from the LCD screen, you can start the next recording. LCD BACKLIGHT switch

RECORDING

Adjust the brightness with the [LCD BRIGHT] item in the menu settings (page 45). This adjustment does not affect the brightness of the images recorded on the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick.” To turn off the LCD backlight Set the LCD BACKLIGHT switch to OFF to save the battery. For the number of images you can record on a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” Using the zoom feature See page 46. Notes • When recording bright subjects, the color of the LCD screen may change after the AE is locked. However, this will not affect the recorded image. • While the image is being recorded on a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick,” the access Zoom lever lamp lights. When this lamp is lit, do not shake or strike the camera. Also, do not turn the power off, not change the position of the MS/FD selector, or not remove the battery pack/floppy disk/“Memory Stick.” Otherwise, an image data breakdown T side: for W side: for wide- may occur and the floppy disk or the “Memory Stick” may become unusable. telephoto angle (subject • When you press the shutter button fully down at once, the camera starts recording (subject appears farther after the automatic adjustment is complete. However, the recording cannot be appears closer) away) carried out while the lamp (page 8) is flashing. (During this time, the camera is charging the flash.) Checking the last recorded image (Quick Review) If you cannot get a sharp focus on a close subject Slide the zoom lever to the W side and move closer to the subject until the focus is You can check the last recorded image by clearing the menu bar from the screen sharp (page 53). (page 39) and pressing b on the control button. To return to the normal recording mode: press the shutter button lightly, or select Minimum focal distance to the subject [RETURN] with b/B on the control button and then press the center z. To delete the image: first select [DELETE] on the Quick Review screen with b/B W side: About 25 cm (9 7/8 inches) on the control button and press the center z, and then select [OK] with v/V on the T side: About 90 cm (35 1/2 inches) control button and press the center z. To record even closer subjects, see page 53. 19 20 Digital zoom function Using the self-timer This camera has a digital zoom function. Digital zoom enlarges the image by digital processing, and it starts to function when When you use the self-timer function, the subject is recorded 10 seconds after you the zoom exceeds 8×. press the shutter button. Self-timer lampWTShutter button The T-side of the bar shows the Control button digital zooming zone. Using digital zoom • The maximum zoom magnification is 16×. • Digital zooming deteriorates the picture quality. When digital zoom is not Select on the LCD screen with b/B/v/V on the control button, then press the necessary, set [DIGITAL ZOOM] to [OFF] in the menu settings (page 43). center z. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen, and the subject is Note recorded 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. The self-timer lamp flashes after you press the shutter button until the image is recorded. Digital zoom does not work for moving images. The indicators on the LCD screen during recording Recording images with the flash Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 87 for a The initial setting is AUTO (no indication). In this mode, the flash automatically detailed description of the indicators. strobes when the surroundings become dark. To change the flash mode, press (Flash) repeatedly so that the flash mode indicator appears on the LCD screen. DISPLAY (Flash) Each time you press the button, the indicator changes as follows. Notes (No indication) tttt(No indication) • You cannot turn off the (self-timer) indicator and some of the indicators used in advanced Auto red-eye reduction : The flash strobes before recording to reduce the red- operations. • The indicators on the LCD screen are not recorded. eye phenomenon. Forced flash : The flash strobes regardless of the surrounding brightness. No flash : The flash does not strobe. You can change the amount of the flash light with [FLASH LEVEL] in the menu settings (page 44). Notes • The recommended shooting distance is 0.3 to 2.5 m (1 to 8 1/3 feet). • Attaching a conversion lens (not supplied) may block the light from the flash and the recorded image may be eclipsed. • You cannot use the built-in flash and an external strobe at the same time. • Auto red-eye reduction may not produce the desired red-eye reduction effects depending on individual differences, the distance to the subject, if the subject does not see the pre-strobe, or other conditions. • The flash effect is not obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location. 21 22 1-5 BBBB Recording BBBB Recording, B Playback

Recording moving images Playing back still images

Moving images with audio are recorded in MPEG format. To record moving images, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power and insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick.” Access lamp 2 3, 4 Control button121Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. The last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LCD screen. 2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to MOVIE. MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.” FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk. 2 Select the recording media using the MS/FD selector. MS: When recording on the “Memory Stick.” 3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD FD: When recording on the floppy disk. screen. 3 Press the shutter button fully down. 4 Select the desired still image with the "b/B" “REC” appears on the LCD screen, and the image and sound are recorded on control button. 120min 640 6/8 the floppy disk or “Memory Stick.” Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select "b/ B" on the LCD screen, then press b/B. If you press the shutter button momentarily "b: To display the preceding image. The image and sound are recorded for 5 seconds. The recording time can be set B": To display the next image. to 10 or 15 seconds with [REC TIME SET] in the menu settings (page 43). INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT FILE BACK/NEXT If you hold the shutter button down The image and sound are recorded while the shutter button is held down for up to 60 seconds. However, when [IMAGE SIZE] in the menu settings is set to When the menu bar is not displayed [320 240], the maximum recording time is 15 seconds (page 46). You can directly select and play back the image with b/B on the control button. Notes Adjusting the brightness of the LCD screen, zooming or using the self-timer • You might not be able to correctly play back images recorded with this camera on other equipment. • You may not be able to play back images whose image sizes are larger than the maximum See pages 20 to 22. image size that can be used with this camera for recording. LCD screen indicators during recording LCD screen indicators during still image playback Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. These indicators are not recorded. See page 87 for a detailed description of the indicators. See page 88 for a detailed description of the indicators. 23 24

Playing back moving images To pause playback

Select X (pause) on the LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. When the menu bar is not displayed Access lamp You can directly select the image with b/B on the control button, and play back the image and sound by pressing the center z. When you press the center z during playback, playback is paused. 2 3–5 Control button Adjusting the volume Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume. LCD screen indicators during moving image playback Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 88 for a detailed description of the indicators. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. The last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LCD screen. 2 Select the playback media using the MS/FD selector. MS: When playing back images in the “Memory Stick.” FD: When playing back images in the floppy disk. 3 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD screen. 4 Select the desired moving image with the control button. "b/B" Moving images are displayed one size smaller 120min 160 6/8 than still images. Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select "b/B" on the LCD screen, then press b/B. "b: To display the preceding image. B": To display the next image. INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT FILE BACK/NEXT 5 Select the B (playback) button on the B (playback)/ LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control X (pause) button button, then press the center z. The moving image and sound are played back. 120min 160 6/80:05 During playback, B (playback) changes to X (pause). INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT OK Playback bar 25 26 1-6 BBBB Recording BBBB Playback,

Viewing images using a xRecommended computer environment

computer Recommended Windows environment OS:Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional You can view or modify data recorded with your camera using application software The above OS is required to be installed at the factory. on a computer, or attach it to an E-mail. Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems described above. CPU:MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster Viewing images using a floppy disk drive The USB connector must be provided as standard. For Windows 98 users Recommended Macintosh environment Macintosh computer with the Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 1 Start up your computer and insert the floppy disk into the disk The above OS is required to be installed at the factory. drive of your computer. However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0 should be used for the following models with the Open [ My Computer] and double-click [ 3 1/2 Floppy (A:)]. Mac OS 8.6 standard installation at the factory:2 iMac with a slot loading type CD-ROM drive, iBook, Power Mac G4 The USB connector must be provided as standard. 3 Double-click the desired data file. Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is Notes recommended when playing back an audio file or a moving image. If you play • Operations are not guaranteed for either the Windows or Macintosh environment if you connect back the file directly from the floppy disk, the image and sound may break off. two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time (except for the USB keyboard and mouse which are provided as standard), or when using a hub. • Depending on the type of USB equipment that is used simultaneously, some equipment may not operate. Viewing images on a computer connected using the USB cable • Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above. This section describes the method for viewing images on a computer using the supplied USB cable. • Windows and ActiveMovie, DirectShow are either registered trademarks or trademarks of What is the USB connection? : You can connect the camera to your computer Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. using the USB cable, to view or modify the images stored in a floppy disk or • Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple “Memory Stick.” Computer, Inc. To make the USB connection: You have to install the USB driver in your • All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of computer beforehand. their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this Be sure to also see the operation manuals for your computer and application manual. software. Notes • Data recorded with your camera is stored in the following formats. Make sure that applications that support these file formats are installed on your computer. —Still images (other than TEXT mode, uncompressed mode and Clip Motion): JPEG format —Moving images/audio: MPEG format —Uncompressed mode still images: TIFF format —TEXT mode/Clip Motion: GIF format • ActiveMovie Player (DirectShow) must be installed (to play back moving pictures). • QuickTime 3.2 or newer must be installed (to play back moving pictures). 27 28 xInstalling the USB driver 9 Follow the on-screen messages to recognize the hardware. Do not connect your camera to your computer before installing the The Add Hardware Wizard starts twice because two different USB drivers are USB driver. installed. Be sure to allow the installation to complete without interrupting it. If the message appears after the installation to verify that you restart the First, install the USB driver to the computer. The USB driver is contained together computer, restart the computer. with application software for viewing images on a CD-ROM which is supplied with your camera. If the drive is not recognized properly, see “Troubleshooting” on page 77. For Macintosh users For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows 1 Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load. 2000 Professional users 2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. 1 Make sure that the camera is not connected to your computer. Do not connect the USB cable in this step. 3 Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon to open the window. 2 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. 4 Double-click the icon of the hard disk containing the “System Folder” to open the window. 3 Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The application software screen appears. 5 Move the following two files from the window opened in step3 to the “System Folder” icon in the window opened in step4 (drag 4 Click “USB Driver Installation for Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me, and drop). Windows 2000”. • Sony USB Driver USB driver installation starts. • Sony USB Shim 5 Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver. 6 When “Put these items into the Extensions folder?” appears, click If the message appears after the installation to verify that you restart the “OK.” computer, restart the computer. 7 Restart your computer and connect the USB cable. 6 Connect the USB jack (mini-B) on your camera with the USB connector on your computer using the supplied USB cable. To the USB To the USB connector jack Push the connector USB cable as far as it will go Computer 7 Insert a floppy disk or a “Memory Stick” into your camera, and set the MS/FD selector to the appropriate position according to the media inserted. 8 Connect the AC power adaptor and turn on your camera. “USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of your camera and the camera is set to communication standby mode. Your computer recognizes the camera, and the Windows Add Hardware Wizard starts. 29 30 1-7 BBBB Playback BBBB Playback, xViewing images 6 Select and double-click the desired image/audio file from the folder. For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows For the detailed folder and file name, see “Image file storage destinations and 2000 Professional users image file names” (page 34). 1 Turn on the power of your computer and allow Windows to load. When viewing an image in a floppy disk 2 Connect one end of the supplied USB cable to the USB jack (mini- B) on the camera and the other end to the USB connector on your Desired file type Double-click in this order computer. Audio* “Voice” folder t Audio file* E-mail image “E-mail” folder t Image file Other files Image file To the USB To the USB connector jack When viewing an image in a “Memory Stick ” Desired file type Double-click in this order Push the connector Still image “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file USB cable as far as it will go Computer Moving image* “Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file* Audio* “Mssony” folder t “Momlv100” folder t Audio file* 3 Insert a floppy disk or “Memory Stick” into your camera, and set Clip Motion “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file the MS/FD selector to the appropriate position according to the image media inserted. E-mail image “Mssony” folder t “Imcif100” folder t Image file 4 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and then to a wall TIFF image outlet (mains) and turn on the power of your camera. (uncompressed) “USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of the camera. ∗ Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If 5 Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly you play back the file directly from the floppy disk or “Memory Stick,” the image and recognized drive, “Removable Disk”(Example (D:)∗). sound may break off. The folders inside the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” are displayed. If the drive is not recognized properly, see “Troubleshooting” on page 77. ∗ Drive identifier depends on your computer. For Windows Me or Windows 2000 Professional users When using Windows Me or Windows 2000 Professional, the following procedures are recommended when disconnecting the USB cable from your computer, ejecting the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” from the camera, or changing the position of the MS/FD selector, while it is connected to your computer. 1 Stop the drive by clicking on the “Unplug/Eject” icon in the task tray. 2 Carry out the operation after the message, confirming the safe removal of the hardware, appears. 31 32 Notes on using your computer Image file storage destinations Floppy disk/“Memory Stick ” and image file names • Format the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” only using this camera (page 70). You cannot format the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” using Image files recorded with your camera are grouped in folders by recording mode. a computer via the USB cable. Images in a floppy disk and ones in a “Memory Stick” have different file names. The • Use only a DOS/V 2HD format floppy disk. Other disks will not be recognized by a meanings of the file names are as follows. computer. • Do not optimize the “Memory Stick” on a Windows machine. This will shorten the When using floppy disks “Memory Stick” life. • Do not compress the data on the floppy disk or “Memory Stick.” Compressed files sss stands for any number within the range from 001 to 999. cannot be played back on your camera. f stands for one of the following characters below. Software S: Still image file recorded at 640 480 size F: Still image file of more than 640 480 size • Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open V: Moving image file recorded at 160 112 size a still image file. W: Moving image file recorded at 320 240 size • When you load an image modified using the supplied retouching software from T: Still image file recorded in TEXT mode your computer to the camera or when you directly modify the image on the camera, C: Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL mode the image format will differ so the “FILE ERROR” message may appear and you M: Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode may be unable to open the file. • Depending on your application software, only the first frame of a Clip Motion For Windows 98 users (The drive recognizing the floppy disk is image may be displayed. [A].) Communications with your computer Storage destination containing still image, Communications between your camera and your computer may not recover after moving image, TEXT mode image and Clip recovering from Standby or Sleep. Motion image data Folder containing E-mail mode image data Other Folder containing VOICE mode audio data When connecting the camera to a computer or when using an external power source, remove the battery pack from inside the camera. 33 34 1-8 BBBB Playback BBBB Playback, When using “Memory Stick”s Location File Meaning 3 1/2 Floppy MVC-sssf.JPG • Still image file recorded normally ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999. [A:] • Still image file recorded in For Windows 98 users (The drive recognizing the camera is — E-MAIL mode (page 49) “ D.” ) — VOICE mode (page 50) MVC-sssf.411 • INDEX display file This file can only be played back on your camera. Folder containing still image recorded in MVC-sssf.MPG • Moving image file normal mode, TEXT mode image and Clip • Motion image dataMVC-sssf.GIF Still image file recorded in Folder containing E-MAIL mode and TIFF — TEXT mode (page 51) mode image data — Clip Motion (page 47) Folder containing moving image data MVC-sssf.THM • Index image file recorded in Folder containing VOICE mode audio data — TEXT mode (page 51) — Clip Motion (page 47) E-mail folder MVC-sssE.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in E- Folder File Meaning MAIL mode (page 49) 100msdcf DSC0ssss.JPG • Still image file recorded normally Voice folder MVC-sssA.MPG • Audio file recorded in VOICE mode • Still image file recorded in (page 50) — E-MAIL mode (page 49) • The numerical portions of the following files are the same. — TIFF mode (page 52) —An image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding small-size image file — VOICE mode (page 50) —An audio file recorded in VOICE mode and its corresponding image file —An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file CLP0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in NORMAL —An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file mode (page 47) • INDEX display files other than the TEXT mode and Clip Motion files are played back only on this CLP0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file camera. recorded in NORMAL mode MBL0ssss.GIF • Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode (page 47) MBL0ssss.THM • Index image file of Clip Motion file recorded in MOBILE mode TXT0ssss.GIF • Still image file recorded in TEXT mode (page 51) TXT0ssss.THM • Index image file of still image file recorded in TEXT mode 35 36

Advanced operations

Folder File Meaning Before performing advanced Imcif100 DSC0ssss.JPG • Small-size image file recorded in E- MAIL mode (page 49) operations DSC0ssss.TIF • Uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode (page 52) This section describes the basic control methods that are frequently used for Moml0001 MOV0ssss.MPG • Moving image file recorded normally “Advanced operations.” Momlv100 DSC0ssss.MPG • Audio file recorded in VOICE mode (page 50) The numerical portions of the following files are the same. How to use the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector —A small-size image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding image file —An uncompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector selects whether you can use your camera to —An audio file recorded in VOICE mode and its corresponding image file record or play back and edit images. Set the selector as follows before starting to —An image file recorded in TEXT mode and its corresponding index image file operate your camera. —An image file recorded with Clip Motion and its corresponding index image file PLAY STILL MOVIE Tips The digital still camera saves recorded images as digital data. The format of the saved data is called as the file format. The formats that can be used with this PLAY: To play back or edit camera are as follows: images STILL: To record still images, JPEG format VOICE images and Clip Most digital still cameras, operating systems of computers, and browser software Motion images adopt this format. This format is able to compress files without appreciable MOVIE: To record moving deterioration. However, if the image is compressed and saved on repeated images occasions, the image will deteriorate. This camera records still images using the JPEG format for normal recording. GIF format Using this format, the image will not deteriorate even if the image is compressed How to use the control button and saved on repeated occasions. This format limits the number of colors to 256 colors. This camera records still images using the GIF format in Clip Motion The control button is used to select the buttons, images and menus displayed on the (page 47) or TEXT mode (page 51). LCD screen of your camera and modify the settings. The operation methods that are frequently used for “Advanced operations” are described below. TIFF format Stores shooting images without compression, so the image does not deteriorate. Most of operating systems and applications correspond to this format. This camera records still images using the TIFF format for the TIFF mode (page 52). Select Set (enter) MPEG format This format is very typical for moving images. This camera records audio using the MPEG format for the moving images recording and the VOICE mode (page 50). 37 38 1-9 BBBB Playback BBBB Playback, Turning on/off the operation buttons (menu bar) on the LCD screen How to change the menu settings Press v to display the menu bar Some of the advanced operations for your camera are executed by selecting menu on the LCD screen. items displayed on the LCD screen with the control button. INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP Press V to clear the menu bar SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF from the LCD screen. Menu bar Note 1–3 You cannot clear the menu bar on the INDEX screen (page 59). Control button Selecting items or images on the LCD screen PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector 1 Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select the item you want to set or the image you 1 Press v on the control button to display the menu bar. want to display. The menu bar appears as follows according to the position of the PLAY/STILL/ The color of the selected item or the MOVIE selector. frame of the selected image INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP STILL/MOVIE PLAY (single mode) PLAY (INDEX mode) changes from blue to yellow. SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF 2 Press the center z to enter the item. Repeat steps1 and2 to execute VIDEO OUT each function. /LANGUAGECLOCK SET MVC–001F 20017410 :30PM

BEEP

EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP LCD BRIGHT SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF SELECT SINGLE DISPLAY INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT CLOSE 2 Select the desired item with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. The color of the selected item changes from blue to

The “Advanced operations” section of this manual refers to yellow, and when you press the center , the settings VIDEO OUT NTSCz /LANGUAGE

CLOCK SET selecting and entering items by the above procedure as that can be set for its item are displayed. BEEP LCD BRIGHT “Select [item name].” Note INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT OK The displayed items are changed according to the position of the MS/FD selector. 3 Select the desired setting with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. To cancel the setup Press V on the control button repeatedly until the LCD screen returns to the menu bar display in step1. To clear the menu bar, press V again. 39 40 Menu settings Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ Menu items that can be modified differ depending on the positions of the PLAY/ MOVIE selector STILL/MOVIE selector or the MS/FD selector. The LCD screen shows only the FORMAT OK Formats a “Memory Stick.” Once you PLAY items you can operate at the moment. Initial settings are indicated with x. (When the format the “Memory Stick,” all of the STILL MS/FD data, including protected images are MOVIE (self-timer) selector is deleted. Be sure to check for images set to MS.) before you format a “Memory Stick.”Records with the self-timer (page 22). CANCEL Cancels formatting of a “Memory EFFECT Stick.” Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ FILE SERIES Assigns numbers to files in sequence STILL MOVIE selector NUMBER even if the floppy disk or “Memory MOVIE Stick” is changed. Note that file P. EFFECT SOLARIZE Sets the image special effects (page 58). STILL numbers are not in sequence between a B&W MOVIE floppy disk and “Memory Stick.” SEPIA xNORMAL Resets the file number that starts from NEG.ART 001 or 0001 each time the floppy disk or xOFF “Memory Stick” is changed. DATE/ DAY & Sets whether to insert the date and time STILL CLIP Sets the image size and number of STILL TIME TIME into the image (page 58). MOTION frames for creating GIF format DATE animation (page 47). xOFF 160×120 Up to 10 frames can be recorded. (NORMAL) FILE 80×72 Up to 2 frames can be recorded.(MOBILE) Item-1 Item-2 Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ CANCEL Cancels Clip Motion. MOVIE selector IMAGE x1472× 1104 Selects the image size when recording STILL DISK FORMAT OK Formats a floppy disk (page 70). PLAY SIZE 1280× 960 still images. TOOL Once you format a floppy disk, STILL (When the 1280(3:2) (When the all of the data, including MOVIE MS/FD 1024×768 MS/FD protected images are deleted. Be selector is selector is sure to check for images before 640×480set to FD.) set to FD.) you format a floppy disk. IMAGE x1472 (FINE) Selects the image size when recording STILL CANCEL Cancels formatting of a floppy SIZE 1280 (FINE) still images. disk. (When the 1280(3:2) F DISK OK Copies all data stored in a floppy MS/FD 1024 (FINE) COPY disk to another disk (page 68). selector is 640 (FINE) CANCEL Cancels the disk copy. set to MS.) CANCEL Goes back to the [DISK TOOL] IMAGE 320×240 Selects the MPEG image size when MOVIE item. SIZE x160×112 recording moving images. 41 42 1-10 Before performing advanced operations Before performing advanced operations, Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ MOVIE selector MOVIE selector REC MODE TIFF Records a TIFF (uncompressed) file in STILL WHITE IN DOOR Sets the white balance (page 57). STILL addition to the JPEG file when the MS/ BALANCE OUT DOOR MOVIE FD selector is set to MS. HOLD TEXT Records a GIF file in black-and-white. xAUTO VOICE Records an audio file (with a still image) FLASH HIGH Makes the flash level higher than STILL in addition to the JPEG file. LEVEL normal. E-MAIL Records a small-size (320 240) JPEG xNORMAL Normal setting. file in addition to the selected image LOW Makes the flash level lower than normal. size. EXPOSURE +2.0EV to Adjusts the exposure before recording. STILL xNORMAL Records an image using the normal –2.0EV MOVIE recording mode. REC TIME 15 sec Selects the recording time for moving MOVIE SET 10 sec images.

TOOL

Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ x5 sec MOVIE selector SLIDE INTERVAL Sets the slide show interval. PLAY COPY FD t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk. PLAY SHOW x3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min (When the (Only in FD t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.” PLAY REPEAT A slide show can be repeated. (When MS/FD using the floppy disk, a slide show is up selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 66).(single) to approx. 20 minutes) set to FD.)mode) xON/OFF COPY MS t MS Copies the image to a “Memory Stick.” PLAY START Starts the slide show. (When the MS t FD Copies the image to a floppy disk. MS/FD CANCEL Cancels the slide show settings or selector is CANCEL Cancels copying of the image (page 66). execution. set to MS.) PRINT ON Marks the still images to be printed PLAY RESIZE 1472 1104 Changes the recorded image size in PLAY MARK (page 69). (When the 1280 960 PLAY (single) mode (page 65). xOFF Unmarks the print mark of the still MS/FD 1024 768 images. selector is 640 480 PROTECT ON Protects images against accidental PLAY set to FD.) CANCEL erasure (page 63). RESIZE 1472 (FINE) Changes the recorded image size in PLAY xOFF Releases protection of images. (When the 1280 (FINE) PLAY (single) mode (page 65). MS/FD 1024 (FINE) CAMERA selector is 640 (FINE)set to MS.) CANCEL Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ MOVIE selector DIGITAL xON Uses digital zoom. STILL ZOOM OFF Does not use digital zoom. SHARPNESS +2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image. STILL The indicator appears (except when the setting is 0). 43 44

B Various recording The number of images or the time

SETUP that you can record on a floppy disk or “Memory Stick” (8 MB) Item Setting Description PLAY/STILL/ Setting the image size MOVIE selector (IMAGE SIZE) Image size Number of images or time* DEMO xSTBY/ON Displayed only when you use the AC STILL Floppy disk “Memory Stick” OFF power adaptor in STILL or MOVIE MOVIE 1472 1104 Approx. 5 Approx. mode. When [ON] is selected, a 10 demonstration will start if you do not operate your camera for about 10 1280 960 Approx. 6 Approx. minutes. To stop the demonstration, turn 1 12 off your camera. 2, 3 1280 (3:2) Approx. 6 Approx. VIDEO NTSC Sets the video output signal to NTSC PLAY 12 OUT mode (e.g., Japan, the USA). STILL 1024 768 Approx. Approx. PAL Sets the video output signal to PAL MOVIE 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL or MOVIE. 10 20 mode (e.g., Europe). 640 480 Approx. Approx. / xENGLISH Displays the menu items in English. PLAY 2 Select [FILE] and then 30 48[IMAGE SIZE] from the menu. LANGUAGE /JPN Displays the menu items in Japanese. STILL 320 240 Approx. Approx. MOVIE 3 Select the desired image size. 15 sec 80 sec CLOCK — Sets the date and time (page 14). PLAY (15 sec)**Still image size: SET STILL • When the MS/FD selector is set 160 112 Approx. Approx. MOVIE to FD 60 sec 320 sec BEEP SHUTTER Turns on the shutter sound only. (The PLAY 1472 1104, 1280 960, (60 sec)** shutter sound is heard when you press STILL 1280 (3:2)*, 1024 768, 640 480 ∗ When REC MODE is set to NORMAL. the shutter button.) MOVIE • When the MS/FD selector is set ∗∗ The maximum recording time in xON Turns on the beep/shutter sound (when to MS continuous recording you press the control button/shutter 1472 (FINE), 1280 (FINE), button). 1280 (3:2)F*, 1024 (FINE), Notes 640 (FINE) • If you try to record 55 images or more on aOFF Turns off the beep/shutter sound. floppy disk, even if the remaining disk LCD Adjusts the LCD screen brightness PLAY (FINE): The quality of the image capacity is sufficient, “DISK FULL” BRIGHT using +/- on the LCD screen. STILL recorded in a “Memory Stick” is appears on the LCD screen and you cannot higher than the image recorded in a MOVIE record any more images.floppy disk even if the image size is • If you try to record 3001 images or more same. Also, the file size recorded in a on a “Memory Stick,” even if the INDEX (Only in PLAY (single) mode) “Memory Stick” is larger than the file remaining memory capacity of the Displays six images at a time (PLAY (INDEX) mode). recorded in a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is sufficient, “NO ∗ The image is recorded in the ratio of MEMORY SPACE” appears on the LCD three to two to fit the printing paper screen and you cannot record any more DELETE (Only in PLAY (single) mode) size. Using this image size, the images. Setting Description PLAY/STILL/MOVIE margin of an image is not printed out. selector However, the slight amount of theupper and lower of the image being OK Deletes the displayed image. PLAY displayed on the LCD screen is not recorded. CANCEL Cancels deleting of the image. Moving image sizes: 320 240, 160 112 (Return) (Only in PLAY (INDEX) mode) Returns to PLAY (single) mode. 1-11 Before performing advanced operations Before performing advanced operations, Tips Creating Clip Motion 4 Record the image for the first Notes The size of the image is indicated by the frame. • Reading and writing data takes more time pixel unit. The higher the number of Files than normal image recording.160 6 pixels, the more information is included. 2/10 • Due to the limitations of the GIF format, So, an image that is saved using a large Clip Motion is an animation function the number of colors for Clip Motion number of pixels is suitable for a large- that plays back still images in images is reduced to 256 colors or less. format print and one that is saved using a succession. Clip Motion images are Therefore, the picture quality may smaller number of pixels is suitable for deteriorate for some images.played back on this camera at attaching to an E-mail. Normally, an • The file size is reduced in MOBILE mode,approximately 0.5 s intervals. The image is recorded in the ratio of four to so the picture quality deteriorates.images are stored in GIF format, which three to fit the monitor ratio. This camera • GIF files not created on this camera may can also record the image in the ratio of is convenient for creating home pages 5 Record the image for the next not be displayed correctly. three to two to accommodate the most or attaching images to an e-mail. frame. common printing paper size. This is the Image recording can be repeated same ratio as the one used in photo- 4, 5 up to the maximum number of developing shops. recordable frames. The frame images are automatically recorded on the 1 floppy disk or “Memory Stick”when you select [FINISH] or after 2, 3 recording the maximum number of frames. 1280×960 1280 (3:2) 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL. To stop Clip Motion creation Select [RETURN] after step 3. 2 Select [FILE] and then [CLIP Note that if you record even one frame, MOTION] from the menu. you cannot stop Clip Motion creation. 3 Select the desired mode. The number of Clip Motion frames 160×120 (NORMAL) that you can record on a floppy Clip Motion of up to 10 frames can disk or “Memory Stick” (8 MB) be recorded. Image size Number of images This is suitable for use on home Floppy disk “Memory Stick” pages, etc. 160×120 Approx. Approx. 80×72 (MOBILE) (NORMAL) 7* 40* Clip Motion of up to 2 frames can be recorded. 80×72 Approx. Approx. This is suitable for use with (MOBILE) 54** 400** portable data terminals. ∗ When recording 10 frames per Clip Motion file

CANCEL

This cancels the creation of Clip ∗∗ When recording 2 frames per Clip Motion. Motion file 47 48 To return to normal The number of images that you can

Recording still recording mode Adding audio files to record on a floppy disk or

images for e-mail (E- Select [NORMAL] in step 2. still images (VOICE) “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in VOICE

MAIL) mode

Images in VOICE mode are recorded Image size Number of images* The E-MAIL mode records a small- in the JPEG format, and audio is Floppy disk “Memory Stick” size (320×240) image at the same time recorded in the MPEG format. as a still image. Small-size images are 1472×1104 Approx. 3 Approx. 9 convenient for e-mail transmission, 3 1280×960 Approx. 4 Approx. etc. Images in E-MAIL mode are 11 recorded in the JPEG format. 1280 (3:2) Approx. 4 Approx. 3 11 1 1024×768 Approx. 6 Approx. 2 17 640×480 Approx. Approx. 1 12 3421Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIEselector to STILL. ∗ When recording 5-second audio. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 2 Select [FILE], [REC MODE], To return to normal selector to STILL. and then [VOICE] from the menu. recording mode 2 Select [FILE], [REC MODE], Select [NORMAL] in step 2. and then [E-MAIL] from the 3 Record the image. menu. If you press and release the shutter button, sound is 3 Record the image. recorded for five seconds. If you hold down the shutter button, sound is recorded until The number of images that you you release the shutter button for can record on a floppy disk or up to 40 seconds. “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in E-MAIL mode Image size Number of images Floppy disk “Memory Stick” 1472×1104 Approx. 4 Approx. 1280×960 Approx. 5 Approx. 1280 (3:2) Approx. 5 Approx. 1024×768 Approx. 8 Approx. 640×480 Approx. Approx. 22 44 49 50 1-12 BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording, To return to normal Notes

Recording text recording mode Recording still • JPEG images are recorded in the image

documents (TEXT) Select [NORMAL] in step 2. images as size selected by the [IMAGE SIZE] menu uncompressed files (page 46). TIFF images are recorded in Text is recorded in GIF format to Notes [1280×960] size other than when [1280 provide a clear image. (3:2)F] is selected.• If the subject is not evenly illuminated, you (TIFF) • Writing data takes more time than in may be unable to record a clear image. 3 • Writing and reading data take more time This mode simultaneously records still normal recording. than normal recording. images in both TIFF format (uncompressed) and JPEG format (compressed) when using a “Memory Stick.” 241Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL. 2 2Select [FILE], [REC MODE], 1 and then [TEXT] from the 3 menu. 3 Record the image. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL. Set the MS/FD selector to MS. The number of images that you 2 can record on a floppy disk or 3 Select [FILE], [REC MODE],“Memory Stick” (8 MB) in TEXT and then [TIFF] from the mode menu. Image size Number of images* 4 Record the image. Floppy disk “Memory Stick” 1472×1104 Minimum Minimum 5 29 The number of images that you can record on a “Memory Stick” 1280×960 Minimum Minimum (8 MB) in TIFF mode 7 40 Image size Number of images 1280 (3:2) Minimum Minimum 8 44 1280×960 1 1024×768 Minimum Minimum 1280 (3:2) 1 11 61 640×480 Minimum Minimum To return to normal 28 160 recording mode Select [NORMAL] in step 2. ∗ The maximum number of recordable images depends on the document condition, such as the amount of text portions. 51 52

Recording images in Setting the distance Using the PROGRAM Spot light-metering mode

macro to the subject AE function Select this mode when there is backlight or when there is strong Normally the focus is automatically contrast between the subject and adjusted. This function is useful when the background, etc. Position the the auto focus does not work well such point you want to record at the spot as in dark places. 1 light-metering cross hair. 1 LCD screen221Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL or MOVIE. 1 2 Press FOCUS repeatedly 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE until the (macro) indicator 2 selector to STILL or MOVIE. Spot light-metering appears on the LCD screen. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE cross hair With the zoom lever set to the W Press PROGRAM AEselector to STILL or MOVIE. 2 side, you can shoot a subject that is repeatedly to select thedesired PROGRAM AE mode. about 3 cm (1 3/16 inch) away 2 Press FOCUS repeatedly until a sharp focus is To cancel PROGRAM AEfrom the lens surface in macro achieved. Twilight mode Press PROGRAM AE repeatedly untilmode. The9 (manual focus) indicator Suppresses the blurring of colors the indicator on the LCD screen goes appears on the LCD screen. You of a bright subject in a dark place out. To return to normal can select from six focus settings: so that you can record the subject Notes recording mode (macro), 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 3.0 m, without losing the dark atmosphere • You can focus only on distant subjects in 7.0 m, and ∞ (infinity) of the surroundings.Press FOCUS repeatedly until both the Landscape mode.• In Panfocus mode, the zoom position is set and9 indicators disappear. Twilight plus mode to the W side and focus is fixed. Notes To reactivate auto focusing Increases the effectiveness of the • When you record in Twilight plus mode, twilight mode function. we recommend that you use a tripod to • You cannot record images in macro with Press FOCUS repeatedly until both the prevent shaking. the following PROGRAM AE modes: and9 indicators disappear. • Set the forced flash when you use the —Landscape mode Landscape mode flash in the following modes: —Panfocus mode Notes Focuses only on a distant subject to – Twilight mode • You cannot record images in macro if the • – Twilight plus modeFocal point information may not record landscapes, etc. indicator appears. – Landscape modecompletely show the correct distance. Use • You cannot use the PROGRAM AE the information as a guide. function when [REC MODE] is set to • Focal point information does not show the Panfocus mode correct distance when attaching the Changes the focus quickly and [TEXT]. conversion lens. simply from a close subject to a • If you shoot a subject within 0.9 m distant subject. (35 1/2 inches) while the zoom lever is set to T side, you cannot get a clear focus. In such cases, the focal point information flashes. Move the zoom lever to the W side until the indicator stops flashing. • You cannot use this function if you have selected the Panfocus mode in the PROGRAM AE function. 53 54 1-13 BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording, Tips Under normal recording conditions, the Adjusting the Tips Normally, the camera automatically camera automatically makes various exposure adjusts the exposure. If the color of the adjustments, such as those for the focus, (EXPOSURE) image is too dark or bright as illustrated iris, exposure, and white balance, as it below, we recommend that you adjust the shoots. However, you may not be able to exposure manually. When the color of the carry out your desired shooting image is too dark, set it toward +, and depending on shooting conditions. The when it is too bright, set it toward –. program AE function provides you with near-optimum adjustments to suit your shooting situation. 1 Set the exposure 2, 3 toward + 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL or MOVIE. Set the exposure 2 Select [CAMERA] and then toward – [EXPOSURE] from the menu. 3 Select the desired exposure value. Adjust the exposure value while checking the brightness of the background. You can select values ranging from +2.0 EV to -2.0 EV in steps of 1/3 EV. Note If a subject is under extremely bright or dark situations, or the flash is used, the exposure adjustment may not be effective. 55 56

Adjusting the white TipsThe image is susceptible to lighting Recording the date Enjoying picture

balance (WHITE conditions. The image looks white under and time on the still effects (PICTURE

BALANCE) sunlight in the summer, and looks red image (DATE/TIME) EFFECT)

under mercury lamps. Human eyes can Normally the white balance is resolve these problems. However, the 4 automatically adjusted. camera cannot resolve the problem by making adjustments. Normally, the camera adjusts it automatically, but, if the image appears in strange colors, we recommend that you change the white 1 balance mode. 1 1 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to STILL or MOVIE. 2 Select [EFFECT] and then selector to STILL or MOVIE. [DATE/TIME] from the menu. 2 Select [CAMERA] and then 2 Select [EFFECT] and then [WHITE BALANCE] from the 3 Select the date and time. [P. EFFECT] from the menu. menu. DAY & TIME 3 Select the desired mode. 3 Select the desired white Imposes the date, hour, and balance setting. minute. SOLARIZE The light contrast is clearer and the IN DOOR (n) DATE picture looks like an illustration. • Places where the lighting Imposes the year, month, and day. condition changes quickly B&W • OFFUnder bright lighting such as The picture is monochrome (blackDoes not impose the date and time. photography studios and white). • Under sodium or mercury lamps 4 Record the image. SEPIA The date and time do not appear on The picture is sepia-toned like an OUT DOOR ( ) the LCD screen during shooting. old photograph. Recording a sunrise/sunset, night These appear during playback scene, neon signs, or fireworks only. NEG.ART The color and brightness of the HOLD (HOLD) picture are reversed as in a Retains the adjusted white balance negative. value

OFF

AUTO (No indicator) Does not use the picture effect Adjusts the white balance function. automatically 200174To cancel picture effect To reactivate auto adjustment Notes Select [OFF] in step 3. Select [AUTO] in step 3. • When [DATE] is selected in step 3, the date is imposed in the order set by the Note CLOCK SET item (page 14). Select [AUTO] when shooting with • The date and time are not imposed onto fluorescent lighting. Clip Motion images. 57 58 1-14 BBBB Various recording BBBB Various recording,

B Various playback To display the next Notes

(previous) index screen Enlarging a part of the • You cannot trim moving images, still

Playing back six Select v/V at the lower-left on the still image (Zoom and images recorded in Clip Motion, TEXT

LCD screen. trimming) mode, or uncompressed images.images at once • Zoom scaling is up to 5× regardless of the (INDEX) original image size.• The quality of enlarged images may be Displays the previous index 3 deteriorated. screen. • The original data is left even if you enlarge Displays the next index screen. the image.1 • The enlarged image is recorded as the 4 newest file. To return to normal playback 1 (single image) 2 • Select the desired image with the 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE control button. selector to PLAY. • Select (Return). 2 Display the image to be1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE Note enlarged. selector to PLAY. When viewing an image recorded in Clip 2 Motion or TEXT mode on the INDEXSelect [INDEX] on the LCD 3 Zoom in/out the image withscreen, the image may appear different from screen. the zoom lever.the actual image. Six images are displayed at once The zoom scaling indicatorappears on the LCD screen. (index screen). Only the first frame of Clip Motion Press the control button files is displayed. 4 repeatedly to select the desired portion of the image. v: The image moves downward V: The image moves upward b: The image moves rightwardMVC- 001F20017412: 30PMB: The image moves leftward DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT SINGLE DISPLAY This shows the position of the currently displayed images relative To return to the normal size to all the recorded images. Zoom out with the zoom lever until the zoom scaling indicator ( ×1.1) The following marks are displayed disappears from the screen, or simply on each image according to the press the center z. image type and settings. : Moving image file To record an enlarged image : VOICE mode file (trimming) : E-mail file : Print mark 1Enlarge the image. - : Protect mark 2 Press the shutter button. The image TEXT: TEXT file is recorded at 640×480 size and the TIFF: TIFF file image on the LCD screen returns to the CLIP: Clip Motion file normal size after recording. (No mark): Normal recording (no settings) 59 60 To skip to the next/previous

Playing back the still image during the slide show Viewing images on a

images in order Select \b/B\ at the lower-left on the TV screen (SLIDE SHOW) LCD screen. Before connecting your camera, be This function is useful for checking the Note sure to turn off the TV. recorded images or for presentations, The interval setting time may vary Set the TV/VIDEO etc. depending on the image size. switch to “VIDEO”. 1 A/V 2, 3 connecting cable 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY. to A/V OUT (MONO) jack 2 Select [FILE] and then [SLIDE SHOW] from the menu. Set the following items. 1 Connect the A/V connecting cable to the A/V OUT (MONO) INTERVAL jack of your camera and to You can select from 1 min (one the audio/video input jacks of minute), 30 sec (30 seconds), the TV. 10 sec (10 seconds), 5 sec If your TV has stereo type input (5 seconds), or 3 sec (3 seconds). jacks, connect the audio plug of the A/V connecting cable to the Lch REPEAT jack. ON: Plays back images in a continuous loop (When using the 2 Turn on the TV and start floppy disk, the slide show stops playback on your camera. approximately 20 minutes*) until The playback image appears on the [RETURN] is selected. TV screen. OFF: After all images have been played back, the slide show ends. Note ∗ The slide show does not end until all You cannot use a TV that has an antenna the images are played back, even if it (aerial) connector only. takes more than 20 minutes. 3 Select [START]. The slide show begins. To cancel the slide show Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3. 61 62 1-15 BBBB Various playback BBBB Various playback,

B Editing 3 When you select [ALL] Deleting images 3 When you select [ALL]

Select [ON]. (DELETE) Select [ENTER].Preventing accidental All the images in the floppy disk or All the unprotected images are erasure (PROTECT) “Memory Stick” are protected. Protected images cannot be deleted. deleted. The- (protect) indicator appears on When you select [SELECT] When you select [SELECT] protected images. Select all the images to be Select all the images to be deleted protected with the control button, with the control button, then select then select [ENTER]. The selected [ENTER]. The (delete) images are protected. 1 indicator appears on the selected 2, 3 images and these images are deleted. 2, 3 In single mode0001- 0006/ 0040PROTECT ENTER CANCEL SELECT OK 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE In single mode selector to PLAY, then0001- 0006/ 0040display the image to be DELETE ENTER CANCEL SELECT OK 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE To release protection deleted. selector to PLAY, then display the image to be If you selected [ALL] in step 2, select 2 Select [DELETE] and then protected. [OFF]. If you selected [SELECT] in [OK] from the menu. To cancel deleting step 2, select the images to be The image is deleted. Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3. 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT], unprotected with the control button, and then [ON] from the menu. then select [ENTER]. Note The displayed image is protected If there are files on the “Memory Stick” and the- indicator appears. In INDEX mode with names having the same last 4 digits as the file name of the image to be deleted, these files are also deleted at the same time. 1 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE To release protection selector to PLAY, then Select [OFF] in step 2. display the INDEX screen. In INDEX mode 2 Select [DELETE] and then [ALL] or [SELECT] from the 1 menu.Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY, then display the INDEX screen. 2 Select [FILE], [PROTECT], and then [ALL] or [SELECT] from the menu. 63 64 Notes

Changing the • You cannot change the size of images Copying images 4 Select the media that the

recorded still image recorded in TEXT mode, moving images, image will be copied onto. (COPY) uncompressed images, or Clip Motion • When the MS/FD selector is setsize (RESIZE) images. Copies images to another floppy disk to FD. • When you change from a small size to a FD t FD: Copies to the floppy Use this function when you need a or “Memory Stick.”large size, the picture quality deteriorates. disk small-size image to attach it to an E- FD t MS: Copies to the mail. The original image is retained In single mode “Memory Stick” even after resizing. The resized image is recorded as the newest file. • When the MS/FD selector is set 1 to MS. MS t MS: Copies to the “Memory Stick” 5 MS t FD: Copies to the floppy 2 disk 2, 3 3, 4 When you select [FD t MS] or [MS t FD], the camera 1 Select the media using the automatically starts copying if the 1 MS/FD selector. floppy disk and “Memory Stick”Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY, then are inserted. display the image of which 2 Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE you want to change the size. selector to PLAY, then 5 Insert or change the floppy display the image to be disk or “Memory Stick” 2 Select [TOOL] and then copied. following the messages on [RESIZE] from the menu. the LCD screen. 3 Select [TOOL], and then “RECORDING” appears. When 3 Select the desired size. [COPY] from the menu. copying is completed, • When the MS/FD selector is set “COMPLETE” appears. to FD To end copying, select [EXIT]. 1472×1104, 1280×960, 1024×768, 640×480. To continue copying the • When the MS/FD selector is set image to other floppy disks to MS or “Memory Stick ”s 1472 (FINE), 1280 (FINE), After “COMPLETE” appears in step 5, 1024 (FINE), 640 (FINE). select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 5 The resized image is recorded, above. then the display returns to the image display before resizing. To cancel changing the size Select [CANCEL] in step 3. 65 66 1-16 BBBB Editing BBBB Editing, In INDEX mode Notes5 When you select [ALL]* • You cannot copy uncompressed images. Copying all the Select [OK]. • You cannot copy the image that is bigger information on your ∗ [ALL] can be selected only when than 1.4 MB. selecting [FD t FD] or [FD t • You cannot copy the images that the total floppy disk (DISK 1 MS]. amount of the images is bigger than COPY) 1.4 MB. If “NOT ENOUGH MEMORY” 6 When you select [SELECT]** appears or flashes on the INDEX You can copy to another disk not only2 Select all the images to be copied screen, cancel some images to copy and try the images you have recorded with with the control button. The again. your camera but also various files you 3, 4, 5 mark appears on the selected • If you eject and insert the floppy disk or have created in other software with images and then select [ENTER]. “Memory Stick” without selecting [EXIT] after “COMPLETE” appears, the image your computer. 1 Select the media using the ∗∗ When selecting [MS t FD], the will be copied. MS/FD selector. necessary number of floppy disks • The number of floppy disks that is needed Notes appears after selecting [ENTER]. for copying is as a guide, which is • Once you carry out DISK COPY, all 2 Select [OK] again. displayed when selecting [MS information saved on the recipient floppySet the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE t FD]. disk is erased to be replaced by newly selector to PLAY, then 6 Insert or change the floppy written data including the protected imagedisplay the INDEX screen. disk or “Memory Stick” data. Check the contents of the recipient following the messages on disk before copying the disk. 3 Select [TOOL], and then the LCD screen. • Be sure to use the floppy disk that has been [COPY] from the menu. “RECORDING” appears. When formatted by this camera to carry out 4 copying is completed, DISK COPY (page 70). Select the media that the image will be copied onto. “COMPLETE” appears. • When the MS/FD selector is set To end copying, select [EXIT]. 1, 4 to FD. FD FD: 3t Copies to the floppy To continue copying the disk image to other floppy disks FD t MS: Copies to the or “Memory Stick ”s 2 “Memory Stick” After “COMPLETE” appears in step 6, • When the MS/FD selector is set select [CONTINUE] and repeat step 6. to MS. 1 Set the MS/FD selector to FD, MS t MS: Copies to the When selecting [MS FD], if the then insert the floppy disk tot amount of total images that will be be copied.“Memory Stick” MS t FD: Copies to the floppy copied is too large to copy to one disk floppy disk, the images will be copied 2 Select [FILE], [DISK TOOL],[DISK COPY], and then [OK] using multiple floppy disks. from the menu. “DISK ACCESS” appears. To cancel copying partway Select [CANCEL]. 3 When “CHANGE FLOPPY DISK” is displayed, eject the floppy disk. “INSERT FLOPPY DISK” appears. 67 68 4 Insert another floppy disk. Selecting still images 4 Select [ENTER]. Format “RECORDING” appears. When The marks on the selected copying is completed, to print (PRINT MARK) images change from green to When you format a floppy disk or “COMPLETE” appears. You can mark a print mark on still white. “Memory Stick,” all data stored on the To end copying, select [EXIT]. images recorded with your camera. floppy disk or “Memory Stick” will be This mark is convenient when you deleted. Check the contents of the have images printed at a shop that floppy disk or “Memory Stick” before To continue copying to other conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print formatting. floppy disks Order Format) standard. After “COMPLETE” appears in step 4, 0001- 0006/ 0100PRINT MARK ENTER CANCEL Note SELECT OK select [CONTINUE] and repeat steps 3 Even if images are protected, these images and 4 above. will be deleted. To cancel copying partway To unmark selected print marks Select [CANCEL]. 1 2, 3, 4 Select the images to be unmarked in 2 Note step 3 with the control button, then If you eject and insert the floppy disk select [ENTER]. without selecting [EXIT] after In single mode 3 “COMPLETE” appears, DISK COPY will To unmark all the print be carried out onto the floppy disk. 1 marks Set the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], 1 Select the floppy disk orselector to PLAY and display the image you want to print. [ALL], and then [OFF] from the menu. “Memory Stick” using the MS/FD selector. The marks on all images are 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], removed. Insert only the floppy disk or and then [ON] from the menu. 2 “Memory Stick” you want to The (print) mark is marked on To print out using the FVP-1 format. the displayed image. Mavica Printer Be sure to insert only the media Set PRESET SELECT SW to PC on you want to format. the printer. To unmark the print mark 3 Select [FILE] from the menu. Select [OFF] in step 2. Notes • When formatting a floppy disk • You cannot mark moving images, Clip Select [DISK TOOL], Motion images or images recorded in In INDEX mode [FORMAT], and then [OK] fromTEXT mode. the menu. • If you mark an image recorded in TIFF 1 mode with a print mark, only the • When formatting a “MemorySet the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector to PLAY, then uncompressed image is printed, and the Stick” display the INDEX screen. JPEG image recorded at the same time is Select [FORMAT], and then not printed. [OK] from the menu. 2 Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], and then [SELECT] from the menu. To cancel formatting Select [CANCEL] in step 3. 3 Select the images to be marked with the control button. 69 70 1-17 BBBB Editing BBBB Editing, Notes B As an external drive Additional information • Avoid getting liquids on the floppy • Format the floppy disk or “Memory disk. Stick” only using this camera. You cannot format the floppy disk or Using the camera as Precautions • Be sure to use a floppy disk case to an external drive of a ensure protection of important data.“Memory Stick” using a computer via the USB cable. • Even when you use a 3.5 inch 2HDcomputer On cleaning • When you format, be sure to use a fully floppy disk, image data may not be charged battery pack or the AC power recorded and/or displayed dependingOnce you connect the camera to a Cleaning the LCD screen adaptor as the power source. on the using environment. In thiscomputer using the USB cable, you Wipe the screen surface with a case, use a disk of other brand. can use the camera as a floppy disk/ cleaning cloth (not supplied) or an “Memory Stick” drive of a computer. LCD cleaning kit (not supplied) to Install the USB driver to the computer remove fingerprints, dust, etc. On operating temperature beforehand (page 29). Cleaning the camera surface Your camera is designed for use For Windows 98, Windows Clean the camera surface with a soft between the temperatures of 0°C to 98SE, Windows Me, and cloth slightly moistened with water, 40°C (32°F to 104°F). Recording in Windows 2000 Professional then wipe the surface dry. Do not use extremely cold or hot places that Users any type of solvent such as thinner, exceed this range is not recommended. alcohol or benzene as this may damage 1 Connect the camera to the the finish or the casing. computer using the supplied On moisture condensationAfter using your camera at the USB cable. seashore or other dusty locations If the camera is brought directly from a Clean your camera carefully. 2 cold to a warm location, or is placed inSelect the drive type using Otherwise, the salty air may corrode the MS/FD selector on this a very damp room, moisture may camera. the metal fittings or dust may enter the condense inside or outside the camera. When used as the floppy disk inside of your camera, causing a Should this occur, the camera will not drive, set the MS/FD selector to malfunction. operate properly. FD. Moisture condensation occurs When used as the “Memory Stick” On floppy disks easily when: drive, set the MS/FD selector to • The camera is brought from a cold MS. To protect data recorded on floppy location such as a ski slope into a disks, note the following: warmly heated room. 3 Connect the AC power • Avoid storing floppy disks near • The camera is taken from an air- adaptor and turn on the magnets or magnetic fields such as camera. conditioned room or car interior tothose of speakers and televisions. the hot outdoors, etc. Otherwise, permanent erasure of disk 4 Open “My Computer” on data may result. How to prevent moisture Windows and check the icon “Removable Disk,” then use • Avoid storing floppy disks in areas condensation When bringing the camera from a cold the camera as an external subject to direct sunlight or sources drive. of high temperature, such as a place to a warm place, seal the camera heating device. Floppy disk warping in a plastic bag and allow it to adapt to or damage may result, rendering the conditions at the new location over a Note disk useless. period of time (about an hour). When using Windows Me or Windows 2000 • Avoid contact with the disk’s surface Professional, see also page 32. by opening the disk shutter plate. If the disk’s surface becomes blemished, data may be rendered unreadable. 71 72 If moisture condensation occurs Charging the built-in rechargeable Notes Immediately eject the floppy disk, then On battery pack lithium battery: • Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while turn off the camera and wait about an • Use only the specified charger with • Connect your camera to house reading or writing data. hour for the moisture to evaporate. the charging function. current (mains) using the AC power • Data may be damaged if: Note that if you attempt to record with • To prevent accident from a short adaptor supplied with your camera, —you remove the “Memory Stick” or turn moisture remaining inside the lens, you and leave your camera with the off your camera while reading or writingcircuit, do not allow metal objects to will be unable to record clear images. data.come into contact with the battery power turned off for more than 24 —you use the “Memory Stick” in a terminals. hours. location subject to the effects of static On AC power adaptor • Keep the battery pack away from • Or install the fully charged battery electricity or noise. fire. pack in your camera, and leave your • Do not attach any other material than the • Unplug the unit from the wall outlet • Never expose the battery pack to camera with the power turned off for supplied label on the labeling position. (mains) when you are not using the • When you carry or store the “Memorytemperatures above 60°C (140°F), more than 24 hours. Stick,” put it in its supplied case. unit for a long time. To disconnect such as in a car parked in the sun or • Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory the power cord (mains lead), pull it under direct sunlight. If any problem occurs, unplug your Stick” with your hand or a metal object. out by the plug. Never pull the power • Keep the battery pack dry. camera and contact your nearest Sony • Do not strike, bend or drop the “Memory cord (mains lead) itself. dealer.• Do not expose the battery pack to any Stick.” • Do not operate the unit with a mechanical shock. • Do not disassemble or modify the damaged cord (mains lead) or if the “Memory Stick.”• Do not disassemble nor modify the unit has been dropped or damaged. • Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to getbattery pack. • On “ Memory Sticks ” wet.Do not bend the power cord (mains • Attach the battery pack to the camera “Memory Stick”, , “MagicGate lead) forcibly, or place a heavy object securely. “Memory Stick” is a new compact, Memory Stick” and are on it. This will damage the cord • Charging while some capacity portable and versatile IC recording trademarks of Sony Corporation. (mains lead) and may cause fire or remains does not affect the original medium with a data capacity that “MagicGate” and are electrical shock. battery capacity. exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” trademarks of Sony Corporation. • Prevent metallic objects from coming is specially designed for exchanging into contact with the metal parts of and sharing digital data among the connecting section. If this On the built-in rechargeable “Memory Stick” compatible products. happens, a short may occur and the lithium battery Because it is removable, “Memory Using your camera unit may be damaged. Your camera is supplied with a built-in Stick” can also be used for external abroad• Always keep metal contacts clean. rechargeable lithium battery installed data storage. • Do not disassemble the unit. Power sourcesso as to retain the date and time, etc., • Do not apply mechanical shock or You can use your camera in anyregardless of the setting of the There are two types of “Memory drop the unit. POWER switch. The built-in Sticks”: general “Memory Sticks” and country or area with the supplied • While the unit is in use, particularly rechargeable lithium battery is always “MagicGate Memory Sticks” that are battery charger within 100 V to 240 during charging, keep it away from charged as long as you are using your equipped with the MagicGate* V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a commercially AM receivers and video equipment. camera. The battery, however, will get copyright protection technology. available AC plug adaptor [a], if AM receivers and video equipment discharged gradually if you do not use You can use both types of “Memory necessary, depending on the design of disturb AM reception and video the wall outlet (mains) [b].your camera. It will be completely Stick” with your camera. However, operation. discharged in about six months if you because your camera does not support • The unit becomes warm during use. do not use your camera at all. Even if the MagicGate standards, data AC-L10A/L10B/L10C This is not a malfunction. the built-in rechargeable lithium recorded with your camera is not • Do not place the unit in locations that battery is not charged, it will not affect subject to MagicGate copyright are: the camera operation. To retain the protection. — Extremely hot or cold date and time, etc., charge the battery if ∗ MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption — Dusty or dirty the battery is discharged. technology. — Very humid — Vibrating 73 74 1-18 BBBB As an external drive Additional information, Watching the playback picture on Effective use of the battery pack • TheEmark indicating there is little TV About “ InfoLITHIUM ” • Battery performance decreases in remaining battery time sometimes If you want to view the playback battery pack low-temperature surroundings. So, flashes depending on the operating picture on a TV, you need a TV having the time that the battery pack can be conditions or ambient temperature a video input jack and a video What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery used is shorter in cold places. We and environment even if the connecting cable. pack? recommend the following to use the remaining battery time is 5 to 10 The color system of the TV must be The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a battery pack longer: minutes. the same as that of your digital still lithium-ion battery pack that has — Put the battery pack in a pocket camera. Check the following list: functions for communicating close to your body to warm it up, How to store the battery pack information related to operating NTSC system and insert it in your camera • Even if the battery pack is not used conditions between your camera and Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, immediately before you start for a long time, store it in a dry, cool the AC power adaptor. place after fully charging it once per Central America, Chile, Columbia, taking shots.The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack year and then using the battery pack Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, — Use the large capacity batterycalculates the power consumption up on your camera. This is to Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the pack (NP-F550, optional).according to the operating conditions maintain the battery pack’s functions. Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. • Frequently using the LCD panel orof your camera, and displays the • To use the battery pack up on yourfrequently operating the zoom wears PAL system remaining battery time in minutes. camera, leave the POWER switch toout the battery pack faster. We Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, on in PLAY mode until the powerCharging the battery pack recommend using the large capacity Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great goes off without a floppy disk or a• Be sure to charge the battery pack battery pack (NP-F550, optional). Britain, Holland, Italy, Kuwait, “Memory Stick” inserted.before you start using your camera. • Be certain to turn the POWER switch Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, • We recommend charging the battery to off when not taking shots or Battery lifePortugal, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, pack in an ambient temperature of playing back on your camera. • The battery life is limited. BatterySwitzerland, Thailand, etc. between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) • We recommend have spare batteries capacity decreases little by little as PAL-M system until the POWER ON/OFF (CHG) handy for two or three times the you use it more and more, and as Brazil lamp goes out, indicating that the expected shooting time, and make a time passes. When the battery battery pack is fully charged. If you trial shots before taking the actual operating time is shortened PAL-N system charge the battery pack outside of shots. considerably, a probable cause is that Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay this temperature range, you may not • Do not expose the battery pack to the battery pack has reached the end be able to efficiently charge the water. The battery pack is not water- of its life. Please buy a new batterySECAM system Bulgaria, Czech Republic, France, battery pack. resistant. pack. Guiana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, • After charging is completed, either • The battery life varies according toRemaining battery time indicator Poland, Russia, Slovak Republic, disconnect the AC power adaptor how it is stored and operating• If the power goes off although the Ukraine, etc. from the DC IN jack on your camera conditions and environment for eachbattery remaining indicator indicates or remove the battery pack. battery pack.that the battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining indicator is correct. Note, however, that the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate shooting time. 75 76

Troubleshooting Symptom Cause and/or Solution

You cannot display a print • You cannot display print marks on moving images, If you experience trouble with your camera, first check the following items. Should mark. text images and Clip Motion images. your camera still not operate properly after you have made these checks, consult your If code displays (C: : ) The picture is noisy. • Your camera is placed near a TV or otherSony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. ss ss equipment that uses strong magnets. appear on the LCD screen, the self-diagnosis display function is working (page 85). tMove your camera away from the TV, etc. The picture is too dark. • You are shooting a subject with a light source behind the subject. Symptom Cause and/or Solution tAdjust the exposure (page 56). Your camera does not • You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. • The brightness of the LCD screen is too low. work. tUse an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 9). tAdjust the brightness of the LCD screen • The floppy disk is not inserted properly. (page 20). tEject the disk, and insert it again (page 16). The flash does not work. • The flash is set to . • The battery level is too low. (The indicator tSet the flash to (no indication), , or appears.) (page 22). tCharge the battery pack fully (page 10). • The camera is in one of the following PROGRAM • The AC power adaptor is not connected securely. AE modes: Twilight, Twilight plus, or Landscape. tConnect it securely to the DC IN jack and a wall tCancel the PROGRAM AE function or set the outlet (mains) (page 10, 13). flash to (page 22, 54). • The malfunction occurs inside the camera. • The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to tTurn off the power, and turn on after one MOVIE. minute, then check that the camera works tSet it to STILL. properly. The date and time are • The date and time are not set correctly. Your camera cannot • The PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector is set to PLAY. recorded incorrectly. tSet the correct date and time (page 14). record images. tSet it to STILL or MOVIE (pages 18, 23). Vertical streaks appear • This is called the smear phenomenon. • No floppy disk is inserted into your camera. when you are shooting a tThis is not a malfunction. tInsert a floppy disk (page 16). very bright subject. • The tab on the disk is set to the unrecordable The zoom does not work. • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode. position. tCancel the Panfocus mode (page 54). tSet it to the recording position (page 16). • No “Memory Stick” is inserted into your camera. Digital zoom does not • You cannot use digital zoom when recordingfunction. moving pictures. tInsert a “Memory Stick” (page 17). • Digital zoom is set to [OFF]. • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK. tSet digital zoom to [ON] at the menu. tSet it to the recording position. The image is in • You shot the image in TEXT mode. monochrome. The picture is out of focus. • Your camera is not in macro recording mode when tCancel the TEXT mode (page 51). you shoot a subject that is about 3 to 25 cm • The picture effect is set to B&W. (1 3/16 to 9 7/8 inches) away from the lens. tCancel the B&W mode (page 58). tSet the macro recording mode (page 53). The image cannot be tConsult the computer or software manufacturer. tMove the zoom lever to the W side. played back on a computer. The resizing function does • You cannot resize moving images, text images, Clip not work. Motion images, and uncompressed images. 77 78 1-19 Additional information Additional information, Symptom Cause and/or Solution Symptom Cause and/or Solution The image and sound • You are playing back the file from the floppy disk Your computer does not • The battery level is low. break off when you play or “Memory Stick.” recognize your camera. tUse the AC power adaptor (page 13). back an image on a tCopy the file to the hard disk of the computer • The camera is turned off. computer. and then play back the file from the hard disk tTurn on the camera. (page 32). • The USB cable is not connected firmly. Your camera cannot delete • The image is protected. tDisconnect the USB cable, and connect it again an image. tCancel the protection (page 63). firmly. Make sure that “USB MODE” is The power turns off • displayed on the LCD screen (page 29).With the PLAY/STILL/MOVIE selector set to suddenly. STILL or MOVIE, if you do not operate the camera • The USB connectors on your computer are for about three minutes while the power is on, the connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing the mouse, and your camera. down the battery pack. tDisconnect the USB cables except for the ones Turn on the camera. connected to the keyboard, the mouse, and yourt camera. • The battery pack is discharged. • The position of the MS/FD selector is not set to the tReplace it with a fully charged battery pack. proper position for the media being used. The image does not • The VIDEO OUT setting of your camera is tSet the MS/FD selector to the proper position. appear on the TV screen. incorrect. • The USB driver is not installed. tChange the setting (page 45). tInstall the USB driver (page 29). The slide show function • The slide show function stops after about • For Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows stops automatically. 20 minutes when using a floppy disk. Me and Windows 2000 Professional users tTo continue the slide show, select [START] Since the camera is connected to a computer with again (page 61). the USB cable before installing the USB driver, the drive is not recognized properly by the computer. You cannot use the • The camera is set to TEXT mode. PROGRAM AE function. tDelete the drive which is not recognizedtCancel the TEXT mode (page 51). properly, then install the USB driver. For details, The macro function does • PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode. see the procedure below. not work. tCancel the Panfocus mode (page 54). Reinstall the USB driver when using Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me and Windows 2000 Professional 1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load. 2 Connect the USB jack on the camera and the computer with the supplied USB cable. 3 Insert a media and set the MS/FD selector to the appropriate position according to the media inserted. 4 Connect the AC power adaptor to your camera and then to a wall outlet (mains), and turn on the power of your camera. 79 80 5 Open “Device Manager” on Windows. Symptom Cause and/or Solution For Windows 98, Windows 98SE and Windows Me users: The indication of the • You are using the camera for many hours under 1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. battery remaining time is extremely hot or cold temperatures. not proper, or the power is • The battery pack is dead. 2 System properties is displayed. Click the [Device Manager] tab located at the immediately turned off tReplace the battery pack with a new one top. even if the battery (page 9). remaining indicator Click [ SonyDSC] in [ Other devices], then click the [Delete (E)] indicates that the battery • The battery level is too low.3 button loccated at the lower-right corner. level is sufficient. tInstall the fully charged battery pack (page 9, 10). For Windows 2000 Professional users: • A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery * Log in with the permission of administrater. time. 1 Open [Control Panel] from [ My Computer], then double-click [System]. tCharge the battery pack fully (page 10). The POWER ON/OFF • A malfunction has occurred in the battery pack. 2 System properties is displayed. Click the [Hardware] tab located at the top, (CHG) lamp flashes when tContact your Sony dealer or local authorized then click the [Device Manager (D)] button. charging a battery pack. Sony service facility. 3 Click [View] in [Device Manager], then click [Devices by type (E)]. The POWER ON/OFF • The AC power adaptor is not connected. (CHG) lamp does not light tConnect the power cord firmly to a wall outlet 4 Right-click [ SonyDSC] in [ Other devices], then click [Delete (E)]. up when charging a (page 10). battery pack. 6 After the message appears to verify that you delete the device • The battery pack is not installed properly. manager, click the [OK] button. tInstall it properly (page 9). • Charging of the battery pack is complete. 7 Turn off the camera, disconnect the USB cable, and restart the computer. 8 Install the USB driver in the supplied CD-ROM to the computer following the procedure on page 29. Perform all steps without skipping. Battery packs Symptom Cause and/or Solution The battery pack cannot • The power of the camera is turned on. be charged. tTurn off the power of the camera (page 10). The battery life is short. • You are recording/playing back images under extremely cold temperatures. • The battery pack is not charged enough. tCharge the battery pack fully. • The battery pack is dead. tReplace the battery pack with a new one. 81 82 1-20 Additional information Additional information,

Warning and notice messages Message Meaning

INVALID OPERATION You are playing back a file that was Various messages appear on the LCD screen. Check the corresponding descriptions created on equipment other than your in the following list. camera. for “InfoLITHIUM” battery only The battery is not the “InfoLITHIUM” type. Message Meaning - The image is protected. DRIVE ERROR There is trouble with the disk drive. The battery level is too low. When the SYSTEM ERROR Turn the power off and on again. remaining time is about 5 to 10 minutes, NO DISK No disk is inserted. Emay flash depending on the battery pack used, operating conditions, or the NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” is inserted. environment. FORMAT ERROR • The floppy disk loaded is not MS-DOS formatted (512 bytes×18 sectors). • Failed to format the “Memory Stick.” • The Floppy Disk Adaptor for Memory Stick is inserted. MEMORY STICK ERROR The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera, or the “Memory Stick” is damaged or not inserted correctly. DISK PROTECT The tab on the disk is set to the unrecordable position. MEMORY STICK LOCKED The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. DISK FULL The disk is full. NO MEMORY SPACE The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is not sufficient to record images. NO FILE No image is recorded on the disk. FILE ERROR Trouble has occurred during playback. FILE PROTECT The image is protected. DISK ERROR A 2DD floppy disk is inserted, or there is trouble with the disk. DIRECTORY ERROR A directory with the same name already exists. NOT ENOUGH MEMORY The remaining capacity of the floppy disk or “Memory Stick” is not enough to copy the image. IMAGE SIZE OVER You tried to play back images with an image size larger than the maximum playback size of this camera. 83 84

Self-diagnosis display LCD screen indicators

Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This function displays the camera condition on the The indicators during recording LCD screen with a combination of a letter and four digits of numbers. If this appears, check the following code chart. The code informs you of the 1 camera’s current condition. The last two digits 2 (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the qs3 state of the camera. qd qf Self-diagnosis display 5 120min 1280 3:2 10 qg • C: ss: ss 6 REC 0:03 +1.0EV 15s You can repair the camera 7 qhDATE yourself. 8 SOLARIZE qj • E: ss: ss qk Contact your Sony dealer or local 9 ql authorized Sony service facility. 0 EFFECT FILE CAMERA SETUP qa SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF Code Cause and/or Corrective Action A AE lock indicator/Focus lock N Number of recorded images C:32:ss • There is trouble with the disk drive. indicator tTurn the power off and on again. O Remaining disk capacity/ B Sharpness indicator Remaining memory capacity C:13:ss • An unformatted floppy disk or indicator “Memory Stick” is inserted. C Focus mode indicator/Macro : Floppy disk tFormat the floppy disk or “Memory indicator Stick.” (page 70) : “Memory Stick”D Battery remaining indicator • A floppy disk or “Memory Stick” not P Recording time indicator compatible with this camera is inserted. E Flash level indicator/Flash tChange the floppy disk or “Memory mode indicator Q Self-diagnosis functionindicator/Recording time Stick.” (pages 16, 17) F PROGRAM AE indicator/Zoom indicator E:61:ss • A camera malfunction that you cannot indicator E:91: repair has occurred. R Self-timer indicatorss G White balance indicator tContact your Sony dealer or local S Spot light-metering indicator authorized Sony service facility and H DATE indicator inform them of the 5-digit I Picture effect indicator indication. (example: E:61:10) J EV level indicator If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times when C:ss:ss is indicated, contact your Sony dealer or local K Menu bar and guide menu authorized Sony service facility. They appear by pressing v on the control button and disappear by pressing V. L Recording mode/Clip Motion indicator M Image size indicator 85 87 1-21 Additional information Additional information Additional information,

The indicators during still image playback

120min 1280 11/122637485MVC-011F 20017412:00AM9AProtect indicator/Zoom scaling : Floppy disk indicator : “Memory Stick” B Print mark indicator G Number of stored images onaCRecording mode/Clip Motion floppy disk or “Memory Stick” indicator H Image number D Image size indicator I Recording date of the playback E File name* image* F Remaining disk capacity/Remaining ∗ When the menu bar is displayed, this memory capacity indicator indicator disappears from the screen.

The indicators during moving image playback

120min 160 6/8 0:1065INDEX DELETE FILE TOOL SETUP SELECT OK MENU BAR OFF A Moving image file indicator G Counter B Image size indicator H Image number/number of Playback button/pause button stored images on a floppy diskC or “Memory Stick”

B is displayed during stop, and X

during playback. I Playback image D Image searching buttons J Playback bar E Menu bar and guide menu F Remaining disk capacity/Remaining memory capacity indicator : Floppy disk : “Memory Stick” 11-2-22 E,

MVC-FD87/FD92 SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY

• This set can be disassembled in the order shown below. MVC-FD87/FD92 2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY (Page 2-1) 2-2. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-5. PK-54 BOARD (Page 2-1) (Page 2-3) 2-3. FC-85 BOARD 2-4. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-6. LCD MODULE (Page 2-2) (Page 2-2) (Page 2-3) SERVICE POSITION SERVICE POSITION (FC-85 AND CD-310/318 BOARDS) (PK-54 BOARD AND LCD PANEL) (Page 2-2) (Page 2-3) Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given. 2-1. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-2. FDD BLOCK ASSEMBLY 5 Cabinet (rear) block assembly 1 Three screws (M2) 5 Two connectors (CN001, 002) 2 Two screws 4 Connector (M2) (CN301) 6 FDD block assembly 3 Connector (CN251) FD92 4 Two screws (M2) 6 Flexible board (CN801) 3 Screw (M2) 1 Flexible board (CN101) 2 Flexible board (CN183: FD87/ CN184: FD92) 2-1, 2-3. FC-85 BOARD 2-4. LENS BLOCK ASSEMBLY 7 FC-85 board 5 Four screws (M2) 6 Claw 1 Screw 2 Lens block 4 Three flexible assembly 2 Screw boards (M2) (CN701, 702, 703) 1 Flexible board 3 USB connector (CN682) FD92 [SERVICE POSITION (FC-85 AND CD-310/318 BOARDS)] : Contacting surface CD-310/318 board AC power AC IN adaptor Lens block assembly FC-85 board Cabinet (rear) block assembly Cabinet (front) block assembly FDD unit Stand Adjustment remote Stand commander CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) 2-2, 2-5. PK-54 BOARD 2-6. LCD MODULE 4 Flexible board (CN901) 4 Cold cathode BR button fluorescent tube 8 PK-54 board 3 Connector (CN702) 1 Three screws 6 Three screws S709 5 Flexible board (CN851) 3 BL retainer 5 LCD module 1 Two screws 2 Two screws 7 Four screws 2 PK shield case assembly Note: When installing PK-54 board, connect S709 with BR button. [SERVICE POSITION (PK-54 BOARD AND LCD PANEL)] : Contacting surface LCD panel Insulating sheet Cold cathode fluorescent tube PK-54 board AC power adaptor AC IN FC-85 board Cabinet (front) block assembly CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) Adjustment remote commander 2-3, 2-7. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION FC-85 ( CAMERA PROCESS, CAMERA DSP, VIDEO, MEMORY, LENS DRIVE, SH DSP, USB I/F, MS SOCKET, FDD INTERFACE, FDD CONTROL,) HI CONTROL, AUDIO, DC/DC CONVERTER FU-152 (DC IN) FLASH UNIT CD-310 (FD92) CD-318 (FD87) (CCD IMAGER) PK-54 ( MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR,) BACK LIGHT DRIVE 2-4 E,

MVC-FD87/FD92 SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

CD-310 BOARD :FD92 FC-85 BOARD CD-318 BOARD :FD87

LENS IC702 IC704 FD92 IRIS IC101 :FD92 METER 16 16 FDD REC/PB AMP, FLOPPYFILTER IC102 IC301IC201 :FD87 CONTROL FDD DATA STEPPING FDD DATA DISK

ND CCD OUT S/H, AGC, CAMERACCD DATA BUS 12 14 3

(SEE PAGE 4-30) MOTOR DRIVE A/D CONV. DSP DRIVE UNIT IMAGER (SEE PAGE 4-15) (SEE PAGE 4-18) (SEE PAGE 4-27) (SEE PAGE 4-8, 10) IC505 MC XRD 16M MC XWE1

MMMMFLASH ROM 20H (SEE PAGE 4-25) PK-54 BOARD (1/2)

H1, H2 IC101 IC501 IC702 TIMING MC CAM, SHOCK DETECT FOCUS ZOOM V1A, V1B, V2, V3A, V3B, V4, VSUB CNT

GENERATOR

(SEE PAGE 4-15) 16 16 SH DSP (SEE PAGE 4-23) (SEE PAGE 4-47) SENSOR SENSOR IC506 64M SDRAM FD92 FD92 (SEE PAGE 4-25) IC182 12 20 CN681 DRIVE + IRIS MSHUT ON (MECHA SHUTTER) MS DIO, MS BS, MS SCLK MS DRIVE FD92 SOCKET (SEE PAGE 4-22) IC302 IC508 IC181 16 DATA BUS 16 EEPROM CN201 64M SDRAM (SEE PAGE 4-20) (SEE PAGE 4-25) FP-335 FLEXIBLE USB ND DRIVE– ND FILTER ND ON DRIVE 14ADDRESS BUS14 IC681 BOARDD+ USB D+ (SEE PAGE 4-21) USB DATA USB I/F IC184 (SEE PAGE 4-26) D– USB D–IC186 IC185 (SEE PAGE 4-26) DRIVE– EVR(SEE PAGE 4-21, 22) (D/A CONVERTER) PE DAC LEVEL 1, 2 IRIS DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-22) CNTC PK-54 BOARD (2/2) J781 HALL+ HALL AD SP VOL HALL AD V OUT ON HALL AMP IC901 AV OUT Y OUT Y OUT VIDEO OUT Z SENS RST Z SENS RST C OUT C OUT VIDEO AMP (SEE PAGE 4-19) AUDIO OUT F SENS RST F SENS RST MIC901 IC183 PE EN1, IC252 MICROPHONE (SEE PAGE 4-21) AU SDTO A IN LPE DIR1A, PE DIR1B IC253 ZOOM MOTOR AUDIO AD/DACONVERETER AUDIO AMP SP901DRIVE SP+, SP–PE EN0, AU SDTI (SEE PAGE 4-33) A OUT L (SEE PAGE 4-33) SPEAKER FOCUS MOTOR PE DIR1A, PE DIR0B SP VOL DRIVE PANEL Y PANEL R-Y BZ901BEEP IN IC651 TG CLK STRB ON PANEL B-Y BUZZER MC CLK CLOCK GEN. USB CLK STRB AIN EXT STRB ON FD87 X651 (SEE PAGE 4-26) FDC CLK PANEL Y VR STRB ON CAM SO, XCAM SCK STRB AIN PANEL R-Y IC901 VG LCD901 PANEL B-Y LCD VB FLASH DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-49) COLORUNIT STB CHARGE STB CHARGE BEEP IN IC904 LCD XSTB FULL MONITORXSTB FULL IC902 LCD TIMING HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK HI SO, XHI SCK D/A GENERATOR CONVERTER (SEE PAGE 4-50)CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK FU-152 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-42) (1/2) IC404 (EVR)IC406 (SEE PAGE 4-49) BL LEV FDD P 5V ZOOM ZOOM SW AD HI EEPROM Q856 BL HIGH SWITCH CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-32) BL UNREG SWITCHING ND801 FDD 4.9V (SEE PAGE 4-32) IC405 IC001 CAM 15V

FU-152 BOARD DC SHUTTER XRS ON1, XRS ON2 TIMERA 4.9V RST SIO, RST SCK IC851 T851(2/2) CONTROL SWITCH CLOCK INVERTERPANEL 13.2V BT701

(SEE PAGE 4-35) (SEE PAGE 4-42) (SEE PAGE 4-32) DC/DC CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-41) LITHIUM TRANSPANEL 4.9V (SEE PAGE 4-51)BATTERY D 3.2V FD92 FD92 CAM 3.2V BATT D401 EXT STRB ON SENS J782 + CAM P 5V UNREG IC401 IC402 LANC IN IC403 LANC SIG ACC ACV +3.1V REG RESET LANC IN/OUT BT901 D 1.8V LANC OUT LANC DC S BATT SIG

UNREG

A 3.2V D402 (SEE PAGE 4-31) (SEE PAGE 4-31) (SEE PAGE 4-31)BATTERY TERMINAL CAM –7.5V – SYS DD ON KEY AD1, KEY AD2 FUNCTION LCD DD ON KEY BATT SIG FD92 FD87 J001 BL UNREG XCAM/PB SW DC IN PLAY/STILL/ PLAY/ACV UNREG MOVIE/XSTILL MOVIE CAMERA ST UNREG BATT UNREG XPWR SW POWER ON/OFF 3-1 3-2 HALL AD SP VOL CAM SO, XCAM SCK CAM SO, XCAM SCK CAM SI, CAM SO, XCAM SCK ADDERESS BUS ADDERESS BUS DATA BUS DATA BUS HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK,

MVC-FD87/FD92

3-9. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 1

FU-152 BOARD (1/2) FC-85 BOARD (1/2) CN801 (2/2)

(SEE PAGE 4-41) J001 EVER 3.2V EVER 3.2V 26 DC IN CN001 CN004 CN001 F003 ACV UNREG66BL UNREG BL UNREG BL UNREG 42 3 BATT/XEXT7741 F001 10 2 ST UNREG ST UNREG PANEL 13.2V TO39 2 ACV GND 11 3 F002 PANEL 4.9V A POWER BLOCK284VCC UNREG L001 (SEE PAGE 3-19) VCC UNREG 4095A4.9V F005 19ACV UNREG ACV UNREG 12 1 PANEL 3.2V 20 F004 BATT UNREG58D3.2V 38 BATT UNREG Q00418 VCC VCC OUT 45 Q001, 004 SWITCHING L007 CN003 (1/2) CN002 (1/2) D401 D40273FAST CHARGE ON BL UNREG OUT A 46 INIT CHARGE ON 6 –INA ST UNREG64+INA7Q010 FDD P 5V FD92 SCPA8EMERGENCY BT901 Q002, 003 DETECT Q024, 032 BATTERY Q005 IC403 Q036, 038CN002 TERMINAL CHARGE Q404BATT LANC I/OCONTROL Q014 13.2V UNREG (SEE PAGE 4-31)+ IC001 EMERGENCY REG1 DC CONTROL DETECT Q023 BATT/EXT82(SEE PAGE 4-35) LCD DD ON SWITCH BATT SIGS2BATT SIG IC4019 1 (SEE PAGE 4-31) Q018 DC PACK SW 4 DC PACK SW5 5 +3.1V T0012 3 REG DC/DC CONV. D002 – BATT GND RECT3 Q001 TRANS L016 CAM 15V IC402 SWITCHING45

RESET

(SEE PAGE 4-31) 3

PK-54 BOARD (1/2) 2D410

(SEE PAGE 4-47) CN701 (1/2) CN801 (1/2) IC40518Q025, 028, BT701 1 50 BATT TIMER OUT B 44 Q031, 034 TO LITHIUM BATTERY CLOCK 11 –INB POEWR BLOCK 2 (SEE PAGE 4-32) –15V –7.5V CAM –7.5V B REG (SEE PAGE 3-19) +IN B 12 IC404 SCP B 13 HI CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-32) Q003 SWITCHING L005 Q013, 016 PANEL 42 45 4.9VBACKUP 4.9V VCC 75 – 7786 87 OUT C 40 LCD DD ON XLANC ON 10 25 +INC L012 FDD 4.9V –IN C 26 SCP C 24 L009 A 4.9V L015 CAM P 5V Q002

SWITCHING

BATT UNREG L004 3.2V L011 71 BATT SENS A 3.2V FAST CHARGE ON 100 FAST CHARGE L008 D 3.2V INIT CHARGE ON OUT D 3927 INIT CHARGE L010 BATT/EXT 30 +IND Q009 CAM 3.2V 20 BATT/XEXT –IN D 31

EMERGENCY

Q409 SCP D 29 DETECT BATT SIG BATTERY 48 BATT SICHARGE 19 V REF 2.5V DETECTOR 49 BATT SO DC PACK SW 65 CHARGE INH 20 POW CONT 21 CTL B RT 16 Q005 – 007 SYS DD ON 29 22 CTL C, D CT 17 D1.8V D 1.8V

REG

VREF 2.5V VREF 2.5V LCD DD ON 47 LCD DD ON CAM DD ON 25 CAM DD ON CAM DD ON 3-17 3-18 V REF 2.5V,

MVC-FD87/FD92

3-10. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 2 PK-54 BOARD FU-152 BOARD (2/2) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCKIC702 IC904 IC902 IC901 TYPE ST/SA model: Please refer to page 7 to (SEE PAGE 4-42) (SEE PAGE 4-42)(2/2) SHOCK LCD TIMING D/A CONVERTER LCD discriminate the type of LCD. RV001 DETECT GENERATOR (EVR) DRIVE ZOOM (SEE PAGE 4-47) TYPE ST (SEE PAGE 4-50) (SEE PAGE 4-49) (SEE PAGE 4-49) CN002 (2/2) CN003 (2/2) CN005WTCN701 (2/2) PANEL D 3.2V64D3.2V 4 31 PANEL 3.2V L902

UNIT

Q901, 902 TYPE SA TYPE ST CN901 13 D 3.2V 9 PANEL 13.2V L901 TYPE SA 12 7 LCD901 FD92 TO D702 COLOR POWER BLOCK 1 EVER 3.2V CHARGE IC68125 IC903 IC852 IC851 LCD (SEE PAGE 3-18) A MONITOR USB I/F D701 VREF AMP. CURRENT DC/DC (SEE PAGE 4-26) VCO DETECT CONTROL FLASH (SEE PAGE 4-50) (SEE PAGE 4-52) (SEE PAGE 4-51) A 4.9V D703 FB681 Q681, 682 CN68132 POWER Q851, 852 Q861 CN851 D 3.2V 3 MS PANEL 4.9V 9 SOCKET11 5 D901

LED

T851 Q854, 856 IC508 IC505 IC506 L702 9 BL UNREG L851 SWITCHING INVERTER 18 ND801 D 3.2V EEPROM 16M 16M 10 TRANS 19 BACK LIGHT (SEE PAGE 4-25) FLASH SDRAM (SEE PAGE 4-25) (SEE PAGE 4-25) FB503 FB501 IC702 IC703 FDD INVERTER CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-30)

FC-85 BOARD (2/2) (SEE PAGE 4-30)

FD92 CN701 IC301 IC501 FDD P 5V 9 CAMERA IC901 IC502 MC CAM, FD92 DSP VIDEO AMP SH DSP NAND GATE (SEE PAGE 4-18) IC302 (SEE PAGE 4-19) (SEE PAGE 4-23) (SEE PAGE 4-23) 5 IC253 IC252 64 SDRAM Q704 – 704 FLOPPYBL UNREG DISK AUDIO AMP AUDIO DA/AD (SEE PAGE 4-20) DRIVE (SEE PAGE 4-33) CONVERTER IC651 CN702 UNIT(SEE PAGE 4-33) FDD 4.9V L255 Q253 CLOCK GEN. FB304 IC406 5 D501 FDD P 5V (SEE PAGE 4-26) L303 EEPROM L502 L254 L253 (SEE PAGE 4-32) ACCESS CN703 FB651 IC704 D 3.2V D 3.2V REC/PB AMP

STEPING

D 1.8V D 1.8V MOTOR DRIVE A 3.2V A 3.2V (SEE PAGE 4-27) CN301 A 4.9V A 4.9V Q182 A 4.9V FDD P 5V FDD P 5V FLASH

UNIT

ST UNREG ST UNREG STUNREG

TO

POWER BLOCK1BBL UNREG BL UNREG(SEE PAGE 3-18) FDD 4.9V FDD 4.9V FD92 FD87

CD-310 BOARD CD-318 BOARD

Q102 – 105 CN101 CAM CN101 CN201 CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM –7.5V –7.5V CAM –7.5V IC101 CAM –7.5V1277IC201 CCD CCD CAM -7.5V CAM -7.5V CAM 15V CAM 15V CAM 15V 11 8 IMAGER CAM 15V 8 IMAGER (SEE PAGE 4-8) (SEE PAGE 4-10) CAM DD ON CAM DD ON CN184 CAM P 5V CAM P 5V L181 CAM P 5V ND DRIVE+ 12 MND FILTER

MOTOR

L101 CAM 3.2V CAM 3.2V Q182 CN183 CH 3.2V D 3.2V F SENS VCC F SENS VCC FOCUS F SENS VCC FOCUS14 SENSOR 7 SENSOR L184 FD92 Z SENS VCC Z SENS VCC ZOOM Z SENS VCC ZOOM IC184 IC185 IC186 IC102 IC101 IC181 IC183 IC182 8 SENSOR 19 SENSOR IRIS IRIS DRIVE EVR S/H, AGC, TIMING ND FILTER FOCUS/ZOOM IRIS(MECHA DRIVE HALL AMP (D/A CONV.) A/D CONV. GENERATOR DRIVE MOTOR DRIVE SHUTTER) (SEE PAGE 4-21) HALL BIAS/GAN (SEE PAGE 4-22) (SEE PAGE 4-15) (SEE PAGE 4-15) (SEE PAGE 4-21) (SEE PAGE 4-21) DRIVE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-22) (SEE PAGE 4-22) 3-19 3-20 E L252 FB301 FB302,

MVC-FD87/FD92 SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For printed wiring boards) (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform) • b: Pattern from the side which enables seeing. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the (The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) measurement points and ground when camera shoots • Through hole is omitted. color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. and reference waveforms. * • There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used) isn’t mounted in this model. • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance • Chip parts. of VOM used.) Transistor DiodeC6544562112333121. Connection Pattern boxBE12332134554321212143(For schematic diagrams) • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics Front side of the lens and tantalums. • Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted. 1.5m kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ. • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat. • Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH 2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. TA A 2520 a and the Fig. b can be obtain. FD87 Kinds of capacitor H Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm) • Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. • Parts with ★ differ according to the model/destination. A B A=BBARefer to the mount table for each function. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic FD92 H curve B, unless otherwise noted. • Signal name XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC • 2: non flammable resistor • 1: fusible resistor • C: panel designation • A: B+ Line * • B: B– Line * • J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. * A B A=BBA• C: adjustment for repair. * Fig. a (Pinws of CN803 on FC-85 board waveform) :FD87 • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. * (Video output terminal waveform) :FD92 * Indicated by the color red. Color bar chart Note : The components identified by mark 0 or picture frame dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Monitor TV or LCD Replace only with part number specified. picture frame Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV or LCD) le numéro spécifie. When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name. 4-1 Yellow Cyan Green Yellow Yellow White Cyan Cyan Magenta Green Green Red White White Blue Magenta Magenta Red Red Blue Blue,

MVC-FD87/FD92

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 J001 CN001 3P DC IN

A ACV_UNREG 1

ACV_GND 2 BATT/XEXT 3

CONTROL SWITCH BT901

CN005 6P BATTERY FLOPPY DISK DRIVE

BLOCK FU-152 BOARD TERMINAL6 UNREG_GND

5 ZOOM_SW_AD CN002 4P

B 4 D_3.2V BATT_UNREG 1S001

(SHUTTER) RV001 3 UNREG_GND BATT_SIG2SZOOM 2 XRS_ON2 BATT_GND3WT1XRS_ON1 DC_PACK_SW 4

SIDE 0 SIDE 1 C D FU-51 HARNESS FU-52 HARNESS E FD92

CN251 2P MIC901 1 MIC_SIGF MICRO PHONE 2 MIC_GND CN201 18P:FD87 CN101 18P:FD92 CN101 18P GND 18 1 GND CCD_OUT 17 2 CCD_OUT

LENS UNIT FC-85 BOARD(1/2)G GND 16 3 GND

GND 15 4 GND V4 14 5 V4 V3A 13 6 V3A V3B 12 7 V3B V2 11 8 V2 V1A 10 9 V1A V1B 9 10 V1B

H CAM_15V 8 11 CAM_15V

CAM_-7.5V 7 12 CAM_-7.5V GND 6 13 GND H2 5 14 H2 H1 4 15 H1 RG 3 16 RG VSUB_CONT 2 17 VSUB_CONT VSHT 1 18 VSHT

I FD87 FD92 CD-310 BOARD :FD92 CD-318 BOARD :FD87 J FRAME (1/2)

4-3 4-4

CCD IMAGER FP-231 FLEXIBLE :FD87 FP-167 FLEXIBLE :FD92

CN001 12P CN004 12P REG_GND 12 1 REG_GND REG_GND 11 2 REG_GND REG_GND 10 3 REG_GND REG_GND94REG_GND BATT_UNREG85BATT_UNREG UNREG476UNREG4 UNREG467UNREG4 UNREG358UNREG3 UNREG349UNREG3 UNREG2 3 10 UNREG2 UNREG2 2 11 UNREG2 UNREG1 1 12 UNREG1 CN183 26P 1 FOCUS_A 2 FOCUS_B 3 FOCUS_B CN002 9P CN003 9P 4 FOCUS_A BATT_SIG19BATT_SIG 5 F_SENS_GND BATT/XEXT28BATT/XEXT 6 F_SENS_RST FAST_CHARGE_ON37FAST_CHARGE_ON 7 F_SENS_VCC INIT_CHARGE_ON46INIT_CHARGE_ON 8 HALL- DC_PACK_SW55DC_PACK_SW 9 BIAS- D_3.2V64D_3.2V 10 HALL+ ZOOM_SW_AD73ZOOM_SW_AD 11 BIAS+ XRS_ON282XRS_ON2 12 DRIVE+ XRS_ON191XRS_ON1 13 DRIVE- 14 ZOOM_A 15 ZOOM_B 16 ZOOM_B 17 ZOOM_A 18 Z_SENS_GND 19 Z_SENS_VCC 20 Z_SENS_RST 21 TEMP_OUT 22 TEMP_COM_(GND) 23 ND_CONT-(NC) CN703 5P 24 ND_DRIVE-(NC) R/W_B 1 25 ND_DRIVE+(NC) R/W_A 2 26 ND_CONT+(NC) COMMON 3 ERASE 4 SHIELD 5 CN184 24P 24 FOCUS_A CN702 5P 23 FOCUS_B COMMON 5 22 FOCUS_B R/W_A 4 21 FOCUS_A R/W_B 3 20 ZOOM_A ERASE 2 19 ZOOM_B SHIELD 1 18 ZOOM_B 17 ZOOM_A 16 F_SENS_GND CN701 19P 15 F_SENS_RST PA 1 14 F_SENS_VCC PB 2 13 ND_DRIVE- PNA 3 12 ND_DRIVE+ PNB 4 11 TEMP_OUT FDD_5V(A) 5 10 TEMP_COM_(GND) STBY(K) 6 9 Z_SENS_GND TOS1(C) 7 8 Z_SENS_VCC FDD_GND(E) 8 7 Z_SENS_RST FDD_5V96BIAS+ FDD_5V 10 5 HALL+ INDEX 11 4 BIAS- MC 12 3 HALL- FDD_LED_IN 13 2 DRIVE- CLOCK 14 1 DRIVE+ FDD_GND 15 FDD_GND 16 HDS 17 FPTS 18 DISK 19,

MVC-FD87/FD92 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15

CPC ND801 FLASH UNIT (FOR CHECK) BACK LIGHT A B

CN801 50P CN701 50P Note 1:CN803 Pin Name AV_JACK_IN 1 50 AV_JACK_IN A/B VIDEO_OUT 2 49 VIDEO_OUT BL UNIT A:FD92 B:FD87 VIDEO_GND 3 48 VIDEO_GND AUDIO_OUT 4 47 AUDIO_OUT AUDIO_GND 5 46 AUDIO_GND

C REG_GND 6 45 REG_GND

LANC_SIG 7 44 LANC_SIG PK-54 BOARD LANC_JACK_IN 8 43 LANC_JACK_IN CN901 24PWhen the machine needs to be repaired, LANC_DC 9 42 LANC_DC please refer to page 7 to discriminatethe type of LCD(TYPE ST or TYPE SA) TESTR/NC 24 EXT_STRB_ON/SENS 10 41 EXT_STRB_ON/SENS RGT/CSH 23 REG_GND 11 40 REG_GND S702 B/B 22S701 MOVE/XSTILL 12 39 MOVE/XSTILL (CONTROL BUTTON) DISPLAY R/R 21

D XPOWER_LED 13 38 XPOWER_LED G/G 20

XBATT_CHG_LED 14 37 XBATT_CHG_LED PSIG/PCD 19 SHOCK SENS 15 36 SHOCK SENS S703 HCK1/CSV 18 KEY_AD2 16 35 KEY_AD2 POWER HCK2/PCG 17 ON/OFF KEY_AD1 17 34 KEY_AD1 CRext/XPCG 16 XSTROBE_LED 18 33 XSTROBE_LED SDUT/ENB 15 A_4.9V 19 32 A_4.9V REF/XENB 14

LCD901

PANEL_3.2V 20 31 PANEL_3.2V HST/CKV1 13 FD92 COLOR PANEL_B-Y 21 30 PANEL_B-Y S704 WIDE/CKV2 12

E LCDVOLUME (+)XCAM/PB_SW 22 29 XCAM/PB_SW CS/STV 11 MONITOR FC-85 BOARD (2/2) PANEL_Y 23 28 PANEL_Y VSSG/XSTV 10

XPWR_SW 24 FP-165 27 XPWR_SW VDDG/VVDD 9 PANEL_R-Y 25 FLEXIBLE S705 26 PANEL_R-Y D701 FLASH VSS/GND 8 D501 EVER_3.2V 26 25 EVER_3.2V (FLASH LED(AMBER)) VDD/HVDD 7 (ACCESS LED(RED)) S401 (MS/FD) MAKER_RECOG 27 24 MAKER_RECOG DWN/CKH2 6 VG 28 23 VG S706 FD92 EN/CKH1 5

F HSY 29 22 HSY VOLUME (-) VCK/XSTH 4FD92

PANEL_COM 30 21 PANEL_COM D702 VST/STH 3 (CHARGE LED(AMBER)) XCS_PANEL_D/A 31 20 XCS_PANEL_D/A COM/COM 2 PANEL_V 32 19 PANEL_V S707 TESTL/NC 1 HI_SO 33 18 HI_SO PROGRAM AE Note 2:CN901 Pin Name HDO 34 17 HDO A/BA:TYPE ST D703 XHI_SCK 35 16 XHI_SCK B:TYPE SA(POWER LED(GREEN)) PANEL_6.5V(NC) 36 15 PANEL_6.5V(NC) PLAY/STILL :FD87 CN702 2P

G PANEL_-15.3V(NC) 37 14 PANEL_-15.3V(NC)

PLAY/STILL/MOVIE :FD92 FD92 SP - 2 D_3.2V 38 13 D_3.2V S708 S710 SP901 (PLAY) (MOVIE) SP + 1

SPEAKER

PANEL_13.2V 39 12 PANEL_13.2V PANEL_4.9V 40 11 PANEL_4.9V FD92 FD87 BL_UNREG 41 10 BL_UNREG BZ901BUZZER BL_UNREG 42 9 BL_UNREG S709 REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 43 8 REG_GND(UNREG_GND) BT701 LCD BACK LIGHT (LITHIUM BATTERY) ON OFF REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 44 7 REG_GND(UNREG_GND) FD92 FD92 J781

H REG_GND 45 6 REG_GND AV OUT

XRIGHT_DOWN(NC) 46 5 XRIGHT_DOWN(NC) AU_SP+ 47 4 AU_SP+ AU_SP- 48 3 AU_SP- S711

FOCUS

XLEFT_DOWN(NC) 49 2 XLEFT_DOWN(NC) J782 BATT 50 1 BATT ACC

I

10 1 CN201 5P GND 5

J ID 4 FP-335

D+ 3 FLEXIBLE D- 2 BOARD VCC 1

FRAME (2/2)

4-5 4-6 CN301 10P STB_CHARGE 1 STRB_PHOTO_ON 2

USB POP_UP_ON 3

A_4.9V 4 UNREG_GND 5 PHOTO_TR_OUT 6 TALLY 7 UNREG 8 STRB_ON 9 XSTB_FULL 10 CN803 22P CN682 6P EVF_VCO(NC)/Y_OUT 22 6 GND_GUARD EVF_VG(NC) 21 5 USB_D+ EVF_BL_4.75(NC) 20 4 USB_JACK_IN EVF_BL+(NC)/C_OUT 19 3 USB_D- HI_VDD/D_3.2V 18 2 GND RESET/XMS_IN(NC) 17 1 GND RXD/MS_DIO 16 TXD/MS_BS 15 PF7/MS_SCLK 14 MAKER_RECOG 13 LANC_OUT 12 LANC_IN 11 HI_UNREG 10 VG 9 CN681 10P COM81VSS HSY72BS TRACK_0063VCC NC54DIO REG_GND45N.C

MEMORY STICK INDEX 3

6 INT FDDRF_A27N.C FDDRF_B18SCLK 9 VCC 10 VSS CN851 20P UNREG_GND 1 BL_LOW 2 BL_LOW 3 LED_GND 4 LED 5 N.C 6 N.C 7 N.C 8 N.C 9 N.C 10 N.C 11 N.C 12 N.C 13 N.C 14 N.C 15 N.C 16 N.C 17 BL_HIGH 18 BL_HIGH 19 N.C 20,

MVC-FD87/FD92

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

CD-310 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-53 for waveforms.

– Ref. No.: CD-310 board; 2,000 series – – MVC-FD92 – • For Printed Wiring Board. 123456• CD-310 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model (MVC-FD92) is printed on this diagram. CD-310 BOARD • See page 4-56 for printed parts location. A CCD IMAGER • Chip transistor -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- Q102 C XX MARK:NO MOUNT 2SC4178-F13F14-T1

BUFFER

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R:REC MODE R10.3/P0 R14.8/ B E P:PB MODE C109 10p R9.6/ C110 R109 P0 XX 0

B C107 R108

0.1u 3300 16V R-7.1/P0 R10.3/P012345678

IC101

L101 CCD IMAGER

C 100uH 1 2IC101

ICX232AQ-131254C101 10u63D101 20V 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9XX R1.2/P0 R14.8/P0R104

D R105 39

R103 220 C111 C105 XX C108 0.1u 16V R107 0.1u 5 R111 1M 25VXX C104 0.1u R106 C102 C103 3300 22u 0.01u R8.7/P0 16V 16V 6 C1064 0 0.1u10V

E

R112 R102 Q10100UN9213J-(K8).SOSWITCH SIGNAL PATH

F VIDEOSIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

REC

FC-85 BOARD (1/12) CN101

G THROUGH THE

FP-167 FLEXIBLE (SEE PAGE 4-15)

Precautions for Replacement of CCD Imager

• The CD-310 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with a CCD imager.

When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the

old one and mount it onto the new one. • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section. • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.

In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts

nor exposed to strong light.

CCD IMAGER

CD-310 4-7 4-8 CN101 18P VSHT 1 VSUB_CONT 2 RG 3 H1 4 H2 5 R101 0 GND 6 CAM_-7.5V 7 CAM_15V 8 V1B 9 V1A 10 V2 11 V3B 12 V3A 13 V4 14 GND 15 GND 16 CCD_OUT 17 GND 18 V4 R1.8/P0 H2 R-7.1/P0 V3A R13.3/P0 H1 V3B R-7.1/P0RG R-7.5/P0 V2 R-0.4/P0VL R8.7/P0 V1A R-0.4/P0 R110 CSUB 47 VSHT V1B R-0.4/P0 R8.8/P0 GND GND VDD VOUT,

MVC-FD87/FD92 CD-318 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-53 for waveforms.

– Ref. No.: CD-318 board; 2,000 series – – MVC-FD87 – • For Printed Wiring Board. 1 • CD-318 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns23456of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model (MVC-FD87) is printed on this diagram. CD-318 BOARD • See page 4-56 for printed parts location. A CCD IMAGER • Chip transistor Q202 -REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- 2SC4178-F13F14-T1

BUFFER

C XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R10.4/P0 R14.7/P0 R:REC MODE C209BEP:PB MODE 10p R9.6/ R209 P0 0 C207 R208

B 0.1u C210330016V XX

R-7.1/P0 R10.4/P012345678L201 IC201 100uH CCD IMAGER12IC201

C ICX202BQ-13 5 4

C201 10u 20V 6 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 D201 XX R1.4/P0 R14.7/P0 R20412R205 39

D R203 220 C211

C205 XX C208 0.1u 16V R207 0.1u 3 R211XX C204 0.1u 1M 25V R206 C202 C203 6800 22u 0.01u R7.9/P0 16V 16V C206 0.1u 0 16V 4 Q2016 E R212 R20200UN9213J-(K8).SO

SWITCH

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO F SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

REC

FC-85 BOARD (1/12) CN101

G THROUGH THE

FP-231 FLEXIBLE (SEE PAGE 4-15)

Precautions for Replacement of CCD Imager

• The CD-318 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with a CCD imager.

When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the

old one and mount it onto the new one. • If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section. • As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC.

In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts

nor exposed to strong light.

CCD IMAGER

4-9 4-10 CD-318 CN201 18P VSHT 1 VSUB_CONT 2 RG 3 H1 4 H2 5 R201 0 GND 6 CAM_-7.5V 7 CAM_15V 8 V1B 9 V1A 10 V2 11 V3B 12 V3A 13 V4 14 GND 15 GND 16 CCD_OUT 17 GND 18 V4 R1.6/P0 H2 R-7.1/P0 H1 V3A R1.3/P0 V3B R-7.1/P0RG R-7.5/P0 V2 R-0.4/P0VL R7.9/P0 CSUB V1A R-0.4/P0 R210 47 VSHT V1B R-0.4/P0 R8/P0 GND GND VDD VOUT,

MVC-FD87/FD92 FU-152 (DC IN) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: FU-152 board; 2,000 series – • For Printed Wiring Board. • FU-152 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. • See page 4-59 for printed parts location. • Chip transistor

C

BEAAA1314KKKKKK

DC IN

FU-152 4-39 4-40,

MVC-FD87/FD92 FU-152 (DC IN) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-39 for FU-152 printed wiring board.

12345678910 11

CONTROL SWITCH A BLOCK

S001 (SHUTTER) CN00512

FU-152 BOARD RV0016P ZOOM3 41 XRS_ON1 W T B DC IN 2 XRS_ON2

3 UNREG_GND -REF.NO.2,000 SERIES- 4 D_3.2V

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

5 ZOOM_SW_AD

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

6 UNREG_GND Q002,003,005 CN003 CHARGE CONTROL 9P

C C002 9 BATT_SIG XX

J001 CN001 8 BATT/XEXT DC IN 3P LF001 7 FAST_CHARGE_ON ACV_UNREG 1 FC-85 BOARD (9/12) R020 6 INIT_CHARGE_ON CN002 ACV_GND 2 10 R0041k 5 DC_PACK_SW THROUGH THE BATT/XEXT 3 FB001 R001 FU-052 HARNESSC003 8.2 4 D_3.2V XX 1k (SEE PAGE 4-31) Q001 7.6 3 ZOOM_SW_AD SI4963DY-T1

D SWITCH 2 XRS_ON2R009 7.8 Q002 1 XRS_ON1

LND001 XX R0082G2SB1122-0 R002 ST-TD 470k R005 R019STATIC_GND S 8.2 6800 47k D00381CN004 LND002 MAZT082H08S0 8D Q003 12P7 UN9213J- STATIC_GND 6 (K8).SO5 0.1 1 REG_GND D0063DBT901 XX S 1.8 2 REG_GND BATTERY 8 TERMINAL43REG_GND

G

CN002 F0047.8 1.4A/32V 4 REG_GND4P D004 D001E MA8120-TXXX 5 BATT_UNREG FC-85 BOARD (11/12)BATT_UNREG 1 FB002 D002 F0031.4A/32V 6 UNREG4 CN001

S BATT_SIG 2 C001 1SS357-TPH3 THROUGH THE

0.022u 7 UNREG4 BATT_GND 3 FU-051 HARNESSF002 1.4A/32V 8 UNREG3 (SEE PAGE 4-35)DC_PACK_SW 4 FB003 7.8 1.8 9 UNREG3R006 0 1M 0 F0011.4A/32V 10 UNREG2 R021 0 11 UNREG2F 12 UNREG1 Q004 Q005 SSM3K03FE(TPL3) F005SSM3K03FE(TPL3) 1.4A/32V 05 SWITCH The components identified by mark 0 or dotted Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont line with mark 0 are critical for safety. critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que Replace only with part number specified. par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié.

DC IN

4-41 4-42 FU-152 8.2,

MVC-FD87/FD92 PK-54 (MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: PK-54 board; 2,000 series – PK-54 BOARD (SIDE A) Part No. 1-680-223- 12 Location: A, B – 3, 4 • Refer to the printed wiring board for suffix number 11 for the parts not be shown here. A FD92 AV OUTKK

K

PROGRAM AE DISPLAY PROGRAM AE FOCUSAK

CONTROL FLASH ACC

(FLASH) POWER ON/OFF (MOVIE) PLAY/STILL : FD87 (PLAY) PLAY/STILL/MOVIE : FD92 (POWER) (CHARGE) • For Printed Wiring Board. • PK-54 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram. • There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. • See page 4-59 for printed parts location. • Chip transistorC65454BE1231231534LCD BACK LIGHT FD92 VOLUME (+) VOLUME (–) 3215454-43

MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT DRIVE

PK-54 4-44,

MVC-FD87/FD92

PK-54 BOARD (SIDE B) Part No. 1-680-223- 12 Location: A, B – 3, 4 • Refer to the printed wiring board for suffix number 11 for the parts not be shown here. K3AK52AKK1AKK7AKK A KK 1198BT701 10 6 ( BATTERY,LITHIUM SECONDARY ( 123454-46

MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT, LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, BACK LIGHT DRIVE

4-45 PK-54,

MVC-FD87/FD92 PK-54 (MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for PK-54 printed wiring board.

12345678910 11 12 13

PK-54 BOARD (1/3) SIGNAL PATH A MODE SWITCH,A/V OUT(LK BLOCK,JACK BLOCK) VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES-

CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE REC

PANEL_3.2V PB REG_GND

B D_3.2V

XHI_SCK

HDO

HI_SO PANEL_V 1 FD92XCS_PANEL_D/A PK-54 BOARD (2/3) PSIG HSY R782 1k

C VG FB789

MAKER_RECOG FB788 J781

AVOUT

PANEL_R-Y PANEL_Y R787 C781 C782 C783 FB790 1k XX XX XXPANEL_B-Y FB791 PANEL_13.2V D785 MA111-(K8).S0 CN701 50P D786 MAZT082H08S0

D AV_JACK_IN 50 LND783

VIDEO_OUT 49 FB787 FLAME_GND VIDEO_GND 48 D787 D788 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 AUDIO_OUT 47 LND784 AUDIO_GND 46 FLAME_GND REG_GND 45 LANC_SIG 44 LANC_JACK_IN 43 DISPLAY VOLUME (+) VOLUME (-)

FOCUS

LANC_DC 42 R718 R720

E S702 S704 R722 S706

R724 S711 2700 4700 6800 33k EXT_STRB_ON/SENS 41 REG_GND 40 MOVE/XSTILL 39 R716 1800 1 FD92 FD92 XPOWER_LED 38 UP RIGHT XBATT_CHG_LED 37 SET S709SET S SHOCK SENS 36 LCD BACK LIGHT ON OFF KEY_AD2 35

F KEY_AD1 34 D702 LEFT DOWN

XSTROBE_LED 33 TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY) A_4.9V 32 (CHARGE LED(AMBER)) S701 PANEL_3.2V 31 CONTROL BUTTON R710 PANEL_B-Y 30 270 R719 R717 FLASH PROGRAM AE 2700 1800 XCAM/PB_SW 29 FC-85 BOARD (12/12) R721 S705 R723 S707 R7254700 6800 33k CN801 PANEL_Y 28 THROUGH THE XPWR_SW 27 FP-165 FLEXIBLE

G PANEL_R-Y 26(SEE PAGE 4-37)

EVER_3.2V 25 MAKER_RECOG 24 PLAY/STILL :FD87 VG 23 S703 PLAY/STILL/MOVIE :FD92 D701 POWER HSY 22 TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY) ON/OFF S708 S710 (FLASH LED(AMBER)) (PLAY) (MOVIE) PANEL_COM 21 XCS_PANEL_D/A 20 D703 TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY) PANEL_V 19 (POWER LED(GREEN))

H HI_SO 18

R705 R713 680 680 HDO 17 R726 FD92 XHI_SCK 16 10k PANEL_6.5V(NC) 15 PANEL_-15.3V(NC) 14 LND701 D_3.2V 13 DUMMY PANEL_13.2V 12 L702 C705 FB782 47uH 22u SE701 IC702 PANEL_4.9V 11 6.3V (SHOCK SENSOR) TA6009FN(EL)

I BL_UNREG 10 0.3 TRIP C710 FB783

BL_UNREG 9 0.3 S1A 0.47u R714 AO 0.9 11k ±0.5% REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 8 R704 S1BC706 XX BI 1.1 0.22u REG_GND(UNREG_GND) 7 3 GUARD BO 1.1 FB784 R715 REG_GND 6 OUT 150kR703 VCC 3.1 XRIGHT_DOWN(NC) 5 GND C711 FB785 AU_SP+ 4 68p AU_SP- 3 FD87 J782 R727 R712

J XLEFT_DOWN(NC) 2 IC702

0 FB786 ACC33 SHOCK DETECT BATT 1 BT701 D784 (LITHIUM BATTERY) MA111-(K8).S0 BL_GND D782 2 BL_UNREG MAZT082H08S0 LND781 PK-54 BOARD (3/3) PANEL_4.9V FB781 FLAME_GND STATIC2 D783 D789 D790 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 MAZT082H08S0 LND782 CN702 2P

K FD92 FLAME_GNDSP901 SP + 1

SPEAKER SP - 2 FD92

FD87 BZ901

05 BUZZER

MODE SWITCH, A/V OUT PK-54 (1/3) 4-47 4-48

54321678910,

MVC-FD87/FD92 PK-54 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for PK-54 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveforms.

12345678910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

PK-54 BOARD (2/3) A LCD DRIVE,TIMING GENERATOR(RGB.TG BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- TYPE ST

XX MARK:NO MOUNT R912 NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

< >:TYPE SA MODEL(REC/PB MODE) Q902SI2301DS-T1 ( ):TYPE ST MODEL(REC/PB MODE) B+ SWITCHTYPE SA <3.1> R945 IC903B R903 *100k <3.1> 56k:TYPE SA VREF AMP,VCO R920 39k:TYPE ST<0> *C906 22k:TYPE SA Q901 R904 2200p L902 82k:TYPE ST UN9213J-(K8).SO 100k 100uH SWITCH *R923 L903 <0> 39k:TYPE SA 47uH IC903 <6.4> 33k:TYPE ST NJM062V(TE2) *R947C907 150k:TYPE SA 22u R984 7.1 330k:TYPE ST R901 6.3V * 22k:TYPE SA VCC+47k 150k:TYPE ST OUT1 13.5 R947 R951 D904 R945 * 10k 1T369-01-T8A TYPE ST * OUT2 L901 C921 IN1- 3.9R937 0.1u R94910uH R984 10k 7.1

C C918 C919 IN2-

47k C924 0.01u R956 C928 * ±0.5% R921 Q904 10u XX IN1+ 2.3 33k 0.001u R927 * XP4601-TXE 13.5 6.3V R953 L904 47k 27k:TYPE SA 7.6 82k:TYPE ST PSIG DRIVE R946 IN2+ 10k 6.8uH C90146XX VCC- 2.3 3.3u 7 20V C902 5 20.01u *R985 R957 C927 R928 56p33k:TYPE SA R948 R950 C926 1k13.5 TYPE SA47k 150k:TYPE ST731PSIG 27k 68k 3300p64C923 0.1u TYPE ST R915 R989 R98525VREF VCO 47k XX R952 R954 R958* ±0.5% XX XX 0 R961 Q90313R987 P_XVD

D XP4601-TXE 33kPSIG DRIVE 6.4

C903 R930 C922 0.1u 10k 0.1u7 9 3.1 0 8(0)<2.8> 3 0 13.5 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 R905 CN901 24P BRT 10k 6 10 1 TESTL/NC

VCOM

2 COM/COM

E R902 R911 P_XHD 2.7 (0)<0.1>R931 R941

27k 100k 100 XX XHD VST/STH 3 VST/STH(7)<6.1> (7)<6.1> VB 3.1 (1.5)<3> 4 VCK/XSTH TEST 2.9 PSIG.OUT B.OUT 1.7 C912 2.2u 3.1 HPOS2 VCK/XSTH TYPE STR932 R942 TYPE SA (2.7)<1.5> XTEST B.DC.DET 100 XWIDE EN/CKH1 C931 5 EN/CKH11.2 (7)<6.1> VG 0 (3.1)<0> (3.1)<1.5> 1u 2.1 BRIGHT 5 G.OUT HPOS3 DWN/CHK2 6 DWN/CKH2CONT C904 0.1u 1.7 C913 2.2u NTSC 3.1 3.1R933 TYPE SA CONTRAST IC901 G.DC.DET R943 TYPE ST

IC904 7 VDD/HVDD

1.7 (7)<6.1> 100 VR 0 (0)<3.1> NT/PAL TESTI/XSTV D907 LCD TIMING GENERATOR 3.1 C933 TYPE ST TYPE SA

XX

PSIG.DET ROUT HPOS4 VDD 2.2u C929 0.22u R981 8 VSS/GND C905 LCD DRIVE 4 1.7 C914 2.2u R939 3.1 0 2.2u 220k IC904 R968 R974 0 SUB.CONT.B R.DC.DET VDD TEST/STV 9 VDDG/VVDDR938 C920 R944 V_REV 3.1 LC12017-52T-TE-B :TYPE SA (0.2)<1.5> 0 150k D906 RD3.3UM-T1B LCD901

F IC901 COLOR2.9 SUB.CONT.R * 13.5 CXD3510R-T4 :TYPE STCXA8116R-T4 GND2 C915 Q905 0.1u 100k VREV WIDE/CKV2 R979 10 VSSG/XSTV LCD

R906 XX XP4601-TXE XHDO 0.3 (0)<1.5> 0 100 VCC1 GND1 COM DRIVE HDO Note 1:CN904 Pin Name HST/CKV1 R980 11 CS/STV

MONITOR

SHA 0.5 R934 H_REV 3.1 (0)<0.4> R969 0XX 0A/B 12 WIDE/CKV2 SHB R907 100260.5 SHA SYNC.OUT 2.9 ±0.5% 4 7.2 COMTST 0 HREV A:TYPE ST NC/XENB (0)<2.6> TYPE ST R908 100 SHB13SYNC.IN52D903 COMTST B:TYPE SA NC/ENB 13 HST/CKV1 SHG33XX 3 R970 0 0.5 SHG EXT.BGP 6.6 XCLR NC/XPCG 14 REF/XENB SHR316.6 VCOM R971(0)<2.8> 0 R909 SHR SYNC.SEP R936 15 SDUT/ENB 39k C916 R940 100 XX 22k C917 11 R972 0 16 CRext/XPCG4.7u 16V 17 HCK2/PCG

G R935 18 HCK1/CSVXX R965 PSIG

*R93812345678910 11 12 0 19 PSIG/PCD 68k:TYPE SA VG PANEL_3.2V12345678910 11 12 47k:TYPE ST 2.9 0 (1.5)<0.2> 20 G/G TYPE ST VR 1.7 1.5 0 1.9 1.2 TYPE SA 21 R/RPANEL_13.2V VB 22 B/B REG_GND 23 RGT/CSH (Note 4) R966 XHDO R918 R922 0 TYPE ST 24 TESTR/NC HSY XX XX R929 R996 C934 R988 100k 0 XX R967 R973 R977 Note 2:CN901 Pin Name P_XVD R919 6800 6800 56k

H PANEL_V

0 A/B XX R986 A:TYPE ST XX R975470k B:TYPE SAP_XHD HDO (Note 3) (1.6) (1) COLOR R976 33k VG Q906 Q907 Q908 XX XX 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3) PSIG REF.VOLTAGE GEN. 3 Note 3:R996 is not mounted on the board BL_LEV PK-54 BOARD (3/3) with suffix number 11

I IC902Note 4:R996 is mounted on the board MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER

C908 with suffix number 12 1.4 1 FB901 0.01u BRT VSS PANEL_Y 1.4 BRIGHT 2.9COLOR PK-54 BOARD (1/3) VDDA FB902 C909 0.01u COLOR PANEL_R-Y BRT_R 1.9 EN 3.1 EN BRT_R SIGNAL PATH1.4 FB903 BRT_B SO PANEL_B-Y CONT 2.1 BRT_B SI 2.5 SI C910 CONTRAST VIDEO SIGNAL 0.01u B_LIM 1.5 SCK 2.8 SCK VREF 1.6 B.LIMIT COMTST 0 COMTST CHROMA Y

J IC902 VCO 1.4 P_GRAY NTSC 3.1 NTSC

D/A CONVERTER(EVR) VCOCOM 1.1 V_REV 3.1 V_REV REC 2.1 COM H_REV 3.1 H_REV 2.9 BL_LEVTEST VCC 3.1 PB BRT_TST VDD 2.9 P_MUTE C932 0.1u D_3.2V

K SCK

XHI_SCK

EN

XCS_PANEL_D/A

SI

HI_SO R92510k:TYPE SA 22k:TYPE ST 05 MAKER_RECOG

LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR

4-49 4-50 PK-54 (2/3) BRT_B BRT_R R910 22k COLOR R913 22k R983

XX

R917 R914 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 47k 33k R916 33k R921 R920 * * R924 R923 PRG 47k *PRG

PICTURE

PSIGGRAY 1.4

XRGB

GAMMA2 1.6 AGC.FILTER GAMMA1 1.4 AGC.OUT SUB.BRT.R 1.8 1.4 AGC.LEVEL SUB.BRT.B 1.6 R926 COLOR 4700 WHITE.LIMIT 1.5 C911 1.8 H.FILTER.IN0.1u FRP 1.5 FRP 1.9 G/Y RGBBLK SBLK R/R-Y/CR BLACK.LIMIT 1.5 B_LIM B/B-Y/CB VREF (7.1)<6.1> H.FILTER.OUT VCC2 REG.OUT 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12 11 10987654321

XCLP COM

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 244321567848 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 C925 XCLP 4.7uHPOS1 SHR 0.5 XCLP HPOS0 3.1 SHG 3.1 SHR XVD 2.9 SHB 0.5 SHG SLSH2 SHA 0.5 SHB RPD R955 SHA (1.6)<1.1>

GND

SBLK GND TEST PRG 3.1 SBLK SLSH1 FRP 1.5 PRG (0)<2.8>TEST/CKO (3.1)<0> FRP (0)<1.4> 1.5 R959 0CKII (1.5)<0> RGT/XCSH R960 0CKO/TEST HCK1/XCSV (1.5)<0> SLSH0 HCK2/PCG 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24,

MVC-FD87/FD92 PK-54 (BACK LIGHT DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-43 for PK-54 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveforms.

12345678910 11 12 13

PK-54 BOARD (3/3) A BACK LIGHT DRIVE(BL BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIES- Q856

XX MARK:NO MOUNT FP102-TL CN851 20P

Q854 SWITCHING L853 T851NO MARK:REC/PB MODE L852 R867L851 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 22uH 100uH 1800 20 N.C 4.7uH SWITCHING 5.38.234519 BL_HIGH ND801 BL_UNREG BACK 8.2 7.7 2 C8665 R868 12p 18 BL_HIGH

LIGHT

R856 R857 1 560 22k 1 1800 3000V 17 N.C 7.82616 N.C

B 15 N.C

C864 3 7.7 0.015u5.1 14 N.C C852 5.1 22u C856 R858 C85945410 13 N.C 16V 18p 560 27pC853 2 0.22u C861 -0.63112 N.C 33u C8621u PK-54 BOARD (1/3) 10V Q860 -0.6 11 N.C FP216-TL 2 INVERTER DRIVE 10 N.C BL_GND 9 N.C 8 N.C Q852

C D852 Q861UN9112J-(K8).SO R860 XX UN9112J-(K8).SO 7 N.C

SWITCH 10k C860 LED SWITCH R873 ±0.5% XX 6 N.C D901 4.9 4.9 4.9 0 120 (LED) PANEL_4.9V R855 5 LED 120k ±0.5% 4 LED_GND STATIC2 R876 68k 4.9 3 BL_LOW 2 BL_LOW LND851 C858 R859 SHIELD_GND 0 1241IC851 0.01u 4700 1 UNREG_GND

D LND852 DC/DC CONTROL R8691234R861 R864 100k

SHIELD_GND Q851 C857 1800 47k UN9214J- 0.022u ±0.5% LND853 (K8).SO

SWITCH

SHIELD_GND 2.1 LND854 SHIELD_GND C851 R852 0.01u XX Q857-859 BL LEVEL IC852 LND855 R851 CURRENT DETECTXX

E STATIC_GND IC852Q857 NJM2406F-TE2 D853

LND85687652SD2216J- QR(K8).SO 1 4.9 1.7 MA111-(K8).S0 FLAME_GND Q853 0.9 D851 UN9213J-(K8).SO 0.9 C863 XX PROTECT SWITCH 0.6 4.9 0.3 0.1u 0 0.3 0.3 0 R854 R862C854 2.5 0 R863 R865 R866 R871 C865 R872 27k 3300 Q859 22k2.2u 1500 1500±0.5% 4700 0.1u 470±0.5% 6.3V UN9213J-(K8).SO

F R853 C855 Q855 Q858 R8706800 2.2u UN9213J-(K8).SO 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 6800

±0.5% SWITCH PK-54 BOARD (2/3) BL_LEV

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont

line with mark 0 are critical for safety. critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que

Replace only with part number specified. par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié. BACK LIGHT DRIVE

PK-54 (3/3) 4-51 4-52 IC851 TL5001CD-E2 GND OUT 0.9 4.9 RT VCC 2.3 1.2 DTC FB SCP IN54123, 4-3. WAVEFORMS

CD-310 BOARD CD-318 BOARD

1 1 5.2 Vp-p 8.4 Vp-p 130 sec 130 sec IC101 1, 2, 3 REC IC201 1, 2, 3 REC225.2 Vp-p 8.4 Vp-p 130 sec 130 sec IC101 4, 5, 6 REC IC201 4, 5, 6 REC33800 mVp-p 1.5 Vp-p 130 sec 130 sec IC101 8 REC IC201 8 REC442.4 Vp-p 3.6 Vp-p 12.27 MHz 12.27 MHz IC101 qf REC IC201 qf REC552.8 Vp-p 4.0 Vp-p 10.80 MHz 10.80 MHz IC101 qg REC IC201 qg REC663.0 Vp-p 3.6 Vp-p 10.80 MHz 10.80 MHz IC101 qh REC IC201 qh REC 4-53,

PK-54 BOARD

1 560 mVp-p q; (TYPE ST) 3.6 Vp-p 300 mVp-p (TYPE SA) H H IC901 8 REC/PB IC904 ej REC/PB 2 400 mVp-p qa (TYPE ST) 3.6 Vp-p 200 mVp-p (TYPE SA) H H IC901 9 REC/PB IC904 rg REC/PB 3 qs 260 mVp-p 6.0 Vp-p 480 MHz

H

IC901 0 REC/PB IC851 1 REC/PB 4 8.2 Vp-p (TYPE ST) 7.4 Vp-p (TYPE SA) 2H IC901 w; REC/PB 5 8.2 Vp-p (TYPE ST) 7.4 Vp-p (TYPE SA) 2H IC901 ws REC/PB 6 8.2 Vp-p (TYPE ST) 7.4 Vp-p (TYPE SA) 2H IC901 wf REC/PB 5.2 Vp-p 2H IC901 ej REC/PB 3.6 Vp-p 11.70 MHz IC904 wh REC/PB (TYPE ST) IC901 wk REC/PB (TYPE SA) 3.2 Vp-p

V

IC904 ef REC/PB 4-55, 4-4. PARTS LOCATION CD-310 BOARD CD-310 BOARD CD-318 BOARD CD-318 BOARD (SIDE A) (SIDE B) (SIDE A) (SIDE B) C101 A-2 R112 B-2 C201 B-2 R212 B-2 C102 A-1 C202 B-2 C103 A-1 C203 B-2 C104 B-2 C204 B-1 C105 B-1 C205 B-1 C106 A-1 C206 B-2 C107 A-2 C207 A-2 C108 A-2 C208 B-2 C109 A-2 C209 A-2 CN101 B-2 CN201 B-2 IC101 A-2 IC201 A-2 L101 B-2 L201 B-2 Q101 B-1 Q201 B-1 Q102 A-2 Q202 A-2 R101 B-2 R201 B-1 R102 B-2 R202 B-2 R103 B-1 R203 B-1 R104 B-1 R204 B-1 R105 B-1 R205 B-1 R106 B-1 R206 B-2 R107 B-2 R207 A-1 R108 A-2 R208 A-2 R109 A-2 R209 A-2 R110 B-2 R210 A-1 4-56, * : R996 is mounted on the board with suffix number [-12] FU-152 BOARD FU-152 BOARD PK-54 BOARD PK-54 BOARD (SIDE A) (SIDE B) (SIDE A) (SIDE B) C001 E-2 D002 B-2 C706 B-6 R932 B-3 BT701 G-6 R910 A-5 D003 E-1 C710 C-6 R933 B-4 R911 B-4 CN001 E-1 C853 G-4 R936 C-3 C705 B-6 R914 A-5 CN002 E-2 FB002 E-2 C856 G-4 R938 C-2 C711 C-6 R915 A-5 CN003 A-3 FB003 E-2 C859 G-4 R939 C-2 C851 G-4 R917 A-5 CN004 A-2 C862 G-5 R945 D-4 C852 G-4 R925 A-3 CN005 C-2 Q002 B-2 C864 G-5 R947 D-4 C854 F-4 R926 B-3 Q003 C-2 C865 E-4 R948 D-4 C855 F-3 R927 A-5 D001 D-2 Q005 C-2 C906 B-2 R949 D-4 C857 G-4 R928 A-5 C922 C-4 R950 D-4 C858 G-4 R929 A-4 F001 A-2 R004 B-2 C923 C-4 R951 D-4 C861 G-5 R930 C-5 F002 A-2 R005 B-2 C924 D-4 R953 C-4 C863 E-4 R937 B-4 F003 A-2 R008 E-1 C925 C-5 R956 C-4 C866 D-5 R940 B-2 F004 A-3 R019 C-2 C926 C-4 R957 C-4 C901 B-1 R942 C-5 F005 A-2 R020 B-2 C929 C-1 R965 D-4 C902 B-1 R943 C-5 R021 C-2 R966 C-4 C903 B-4 R944 D-4 FB001 E-1 D701 B-6 R967 D-3 C904 B-4 R955 C-4 D702 C-3 R979 C-2 C905 C-4 R958 C-4 LF001 D-1 D703 C-3 R980 C-2 C907 B-2 R959 C-4 D786 A-6 * R996 B-4 C908 B-3 R960 C-4 Q001 D-2 D787 A-6 C909 B-3 R961 C-3 Q004 D-2 D853 E-4 S701 B-1 C910 A-3 R968 C-3 D904 D-4 S702 B-3 C911 B-3 R969 C-3 R001 E-1 S703 B-3 C912 A-4 R970 C-3 R002 E-2 FB781 B-7 S704 F-7 C913 A-4 R971 D-3 R006 C-2 FB782 B-6 S705 B-6 C914 A-4 R972 D-4 FB783 B-7 S706 F-7 C917 B-3 R973 D-4 FB784 B-6 S707 B-4 C918 D-4 R974 B-1 FB785 B-6 S708 B-6 C920 D-5 R975 D-4 FB786 B-7 S709 F-7 C921 D-4 R976 D-3 FB788 A-6 S710 B-4 C927 C-4 R977 D-4 FB789 A-6 S711 B-5 C928 C-3 R981 B-2 FB790 B-7 C931 B-2 R984 A-5 FB791 A-6 C932 B-6 R985 A-5 C933 B-2 R987 B-5 IC702 B-6 R988 B-3 IC852 E-3 CN701 A-2 IC903 D-4 CN702 D-3 SE701 B-7 CN851 D-5 J781 A-7 CN901 C-2 T851 E-5 J782 B-7 D782 B-6 Q851 E-4 D783 B-6 Q852 E-4 D784 B-7 Q854 G-5 D785 A-6 Q855 F-4 D788 B-6 Q856 G-5 D789 B-7 Q857 F-4 D790 B-7 Q858 F-4 D906 B-2 Q859 F-4 Q860 G-5 FB787 A-6 Q861 F-4 FB901 B-3 Q901 C-1 FB902 B-3 Q902 C-2 FB903 A-3 Q905 C-2 IC851 F-4 R710 C-3 IC901 B-4 R712 A-1 IC902 B-5 R713 C-3 IC904 C-4 R716 A-3 R717 A-2 L702 B-6 R718 B-3 L851 G-4 R719 B-2 L852 G-4 R720 B-3 L853 G-5 R721 B-4 L901 B-1 R722 G-7 L902 B-1 R723 B-4 L903 D-4 R724 B-5 L904 C-4 R725 B-4 R726 B-5 Q853 F-4 R727 G-7 Q903 B-5 R782 A-6 Q904 C-4 R856 G-4 Q908 D-3 R857 G-4 R858 G-4 R703 B-6 R861 F-4 R705 B-6 R862 F-4 R714 C-6 R863 F-4 R715 B-6 R865 F-4 R787 A-6 R866 F-4 R853 F-4 R867 F-5 R854 F-4 R868 F-5 R855 G-4 R871 E-4 R859 G-4 R873 E-4 R860 G-4 R901 B-1 R864 E-4 R903 B-1 R869 E-4 R904 B-1 R870 E-4 R912 B-2 R872 E-4 R913 B-5 R876 E-4 R916 B-5 R902 B-4 R920 A-5 R905 B-4 R921 A-5 R906 B-4 R923 A-5 R907 B-4 R924 A-5 R908 B-4 R931 B-4 R909 B-3 4-59 E,

MVC-FD87/FD92 SECTION 5 ADJUSTMENTS Before starting adjustment EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board. Procedure 1 Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board is replaced. (Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced) Save the EVR data Download the saved to a personal computer. data to a machine. Procedure 2 Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM to the replaced board. Remove the EEPROM and install it. (Former board) (New board) Procedure 3 When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or in- stalled, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it. (Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired) Download the data. Save the data. (The same model of the same destination) After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 5-2 for the items to be checked.) 5-1, 1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.

Replaced parts Block Mounted parts Board replacement replacement replacement Adjustment section Adjustment Initialization of Initialization of D page datazzz7, B, D, E, F, page data Initialization of 7, B, E, F page datazzzVideo Video sync level adj. (FD92) zzzzzzVideo burst level adj. (FD92) zzzzzzCamera Hall adj. zzzzzzzzFlange back adj. zzzzzzzFNo. standard data inputzzzzzzzMechanical shutter adjustmentzzzzzzzLight level adj. zzzzzzzzzAuto white balance standard data inputzzzzzzzzzWhite balance ND filter compensationzzzzz(FD92) Auto white balance adj. zzzzzzzzzColor reproduction adj. zzzzzzzzzColor reproduction adj. (ND filter ON) zzzzz(FD92) Strobe white balance adj. zzzzzzzzzCCD (black and white) defectzzzzzcompensation LCD LCD initial data inputzzzzVCO adj. (NTSC) zzzzzzVCO adj. (PAL) zzzzzzBlack limit adj. zzzzzzBright adj. zzzzzzContrast adj. zzzzzzColor adj. zzzzzzVG center adj. zzzzzzV-COM adj. zzzzzzzWhite balance adj. zzzzzzzzSystem control Battery down adj. zzzzZoom center adj. z z Alignment check (FDD unit) z z

Table 5-1-1

5-2 Lens device (FD87) Lens device (FD92) Flash unit LCD block LCD901 (LCD panel) LCD block ND9001 (Back light unit) FDD unit CD-318 board IC201 (CCD imager) (FD87) CD-310 board IC101 (CCD imager) (FD92) FC-85 board IC102 (S/H, AGC, A/D) (FD87) FC-85 board IC102 (S/H, AGC, A/D) (FD92) FC-85 board IC186 (EVR) FC-85 board IC301 (CAMERA DSP) FC-85 board IC901 (VIDEO AMP) (FD92) PK-54 board IC901 (LCD drive) PK-54 board IC904 (LCD Timing generator) PK-54 board IC902 (EVR) FC-85 board (COMPLETE) (FD87) FC-85 board (COMPLETE) (FD92) PK-54 board (COMPLETE) FC-85 board IC508 EEPROM FC-85 board IC406 EEPROM, 5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS 1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT 1-1-1. List of service tools • Oscilloscope • Regulated power supply • AC power adaptor (AC-L10A) • Digital voltmeter • Vectorscope • Color monitor Ref. No. Name Parts Code Usage J-1 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A Auto white balance adjustment/check White balance adjustment/check J-2 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A J-3 Color chart for pattern box J-6020-250-A J-4 Siemens star J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back J-5 Adjusting remote commander (RM-95 upgraded) (Note2) J-6082-053-B J-6 Clear chart for pattern box J-6080-621-A White balance adjustment. J-7 CPC-12 jig J-6082-436-A For connecting the adjustment remote commander For adjusting the LCD block J-8 Alignment disk (Two disks as a pair) TFD2-1(+) 8-967-990-01 Dynamic inspection disk with LCD adjustment signal TFD2-2(–) 8-967-990-11 J-9 Personal computer PC with Windows installed J-10 Cleaning disk (OR-D29WA) 8-960-009-39 FDD head cleaning (Note 1) Cleaning disk Available on market J-11 Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back J-12 Power supply cord (DC) J-6082-223-A For the battery down adjustment Note 1: Usage and operating note Note 2: If the microprocessor IC in the adjusting remote One or two seconds of momentary use of cleaning disk is commander is not the new microprocessor (UPD7503G- sufficient such that FD is accessed momentarily by system C56-12), the pages cannot be switched. control when the main power is turned on. After cleaning, In this case, replace with the new microprocessor (8-759- insert a FD for playback. When cleaning is insufficient, 148-35). use a cleaning disk again. Caution: Avoid using a cleaning disk excessively. Head can be broken. J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5 J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10 J-11 J-12 Fig. 5-1-1 5-3, 1-1-2. Preparations Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to “2. DISASSEMBLY”. Pattern box Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards need not be disassemble. 1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1- Front side of the lens 5. 2) Connect the Adjusting remote commander to FC-85 board CN803 via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). (See Fig. 5-1-3) 1.5m Note 3: Setting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON” Mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com- mander. The Above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON Mode”. Fig. 5-1-2 Note 4: Exiting the “Forced CAMERA mode power ON Mode” 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com- mander. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged with 200 V to 300 V voltage. Discharge this voltage before start- ing adjustments in order to protect service engineers from electric shock during adjustment. Discharge procedure 1. Press the FLASH button (PK-54 board S705) and turn off the FLASH LED (PK-54 board D701). 2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 5-1-5 locally by yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Al- low ten seconds to discharge the voltage. R: 1 kΩ/1 W CPC cover (Part code: 22 1-215-869-11) 1 FC-85 board CPC-12 jig CN803 (J-6082-436-A) Fig. 5-1-3 Capacitor 1 kΩ/1 W Wrap insulating tape. Fig. 5-1-5 Fig. 5-1-4 5-4, AC power adaptor AC IN Need not connected FU-152 BOARD CN001 CN002 CN005 CN003 FDD UNIT CN004

SHUTTER

FLASH BLOCK

UNIT

MIC UNIT CN001 (FD92) CN002 CN301 CN251 CN701 Adjusting Remote CN702 Commander CN703 FC-85 BOARD LENS UNIT CN101 CD310/318 CN183 (FD92) CN101: FD92 BOARD CN183 (FD87) CN201: FD87 CN801 CN803 Audio Terminated (black) A/V OUT jack CN701 75 Ω PK-54 BOARD CN901 Video CN851 CN702 (yellow) Vectorscope Color monitor LCD PANEL CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) BACK LIGHT BUZZER (FD87) SPEAKER (FD92) Note: Connect the GND terminal to Floppy disk drive unit frame when check the RF signals waveform. Fig. 5-1-6 5-5, 1-1-4. Precautions 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and per- form adjustments. 1. PLAY/CAMERA/MOVIE switch (PK-54 board S708, S710) ... CAMERA 2. PROGRAM AE button (PK-54 board S707) ... AUTO (No mark indicated on LCD) 3. DISPLAY button (PK-54 board S702) ... OSD OFF 4. P.EFFECT (Menu display) ... OFF 5. DEMO (Menu display) ... OFF 2. Order of Adjustments Basically carry out adjustments in the order given. Color bar chart (Color bar standard picture frame) FD87HABA=BBAElectronic beam scanning frame FD92HCC=D D Monitor TV or LCD picture frame

V

A B A=BBAFig. b (Picture on monitor TV or LCD) Enlargement Fig. a (Pinws of CN803 on FC-85 board waveform) :FD87 (Video output terminal waveform) :FD92 Difference in level Adjust the camera zoom and direction toBAobtain the output waveform shown in Fig a and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b. Fig. 5-1-7 3. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame). When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, ad- just the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-7. (Standard pic- ture frame) 2) Clear chart (Standard picture frame) White Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a 841 mm clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations dur- Black ing this time) 3) Chart for flange back adjustment Join together a piece of white A0 size paper (1189mm × 841 mm) and a piece of black paper to make the chart shown in 1189 mm Fig. 5-1-8. Fig. 5-1-8 Note: Use a non-reflecting and non-glazing vellum paper. The size must be A0 or larger and the joint between the white and black paper must not have any undulations. 5-6 Yellow Yellow Cyan Cyan Green Green White White Magenta Magenta Red Red Blue Blue Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue, 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box A dark room is required to provide an accurate flash adjustment. If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below; 1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness. woody board A (2) woody board B (2) woody board C (1) 530 mm 500 mm 1000 mm 1026 mm 1026 mm 1000 mm 1030 mm 1000 mm Fig. 5-1-9 2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B. 3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C. 4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig 5-1-10) woody board A woody board B woody board A woody board B woody board C Fig. 5-1-10 5-7, 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7 PAGE DATA 1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data 1. Initializing D Page Data Note: If the D page data has been initialized, the following adjustments need to be performed again. 1) Modification of D page data 2) LCD system adjustments 3) Battery end adjustments Adjusting page D Adjusting Address 10 to EF Initializing Method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012203 → 05 (FD87), 00 (FD92) 3 2 00 2D4201 2D Press PAUSE button. 5 2 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Perform “Modification ofD6page Data”. 2. Modification of D Page Data If the D page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input. Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate. 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value. Processing after Completing Modification of D Page Data: Order Page Address Data Procedure1200 292201 29 Press PAUSE button. 5-8, 3. D Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing of D Page Data”) Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of D Page Data”) Initial value Initial value Address Remark Address Remark FD87 FD92 FD87 FD92 00 to 0F Fixed data-2 (FD87) A9 (Note 3) 10 00 00 Test mode Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) 11 to 13 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) AA to AF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Fixed data-2 (FD87) Fixed data-2 (FD87) 14 (Note 3) B0 (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) 15, 16 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) B1 to CF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Fixed data-2 (FD87) D0 74/80 74/80 Bright adj. (Note 4) 17 (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) D1 74 74 Color adj. 18 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) D2 A8 A8 White balance adj. Fixed data-2 (FD87) D3 88 88 19 (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) D4 C0/C8 C0/C8 Contrast adj. (Note 4) 1A to 2B Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) D5 90/98 90/98 Black limit adj. (Note 4) Fixed data-2 (FD87) D6 84/90 84/90 VG center adj. (Note 4) 2C, 2D (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) D7 78/70 78/70 VCO adj. (NTSC) (Note 4) 2E to 38 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) D8 75/98 75/98 V-COM adj. (Note 4) Fixed data-2 (FD87) Fixed data-2 (FD87) 39 (Note 3) D9 (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) 3A to 49 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) DA to DC Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Fixed data-2 (FD87) DD 98/90 98/90 VCO adj. (PAL) (Note 4) 4A (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) Fixed data-2 (FD87) DE (Note 3) 4B to77 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) Fixed data-2 (FD87) DF to EF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 78 to 7D (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) Note 3: There are two types of FD87, MP1 type and MP5 type. 7E, 7F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) The data need not be changed if MP1 type is initialized, but the Fixed Data-2 must be changed if MP5 type is Fixed data-2 (FD87) 80 to 87 (Note 3) initialized. Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) Note 4: LCD TYPE ST/LCD TYPE SA 88 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Version check method: 89 80 80 Zoom center adj. 1) Select page 2, and address: FF. Fixed data-2 (FD87) 2) The version of FD87 can be checked from the displayed data. 8A, 8B (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) Data Version 8C to 8F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 01 MP1 90 80 90 05 MP5 91 88 98 92 AD A7 Battery down adj. 93 C2 BC 94 CD C7 95 to 97 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Fixed data-2 (FD87) 98 to A1 (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) A2 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Fixed data-2 (FD87) A3 (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) A4 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Fixed data-2 (FD87) A5 (Note 3) Fixed data 1 (Initialized data) (FD92) A6 to A8 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 5-9, 1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7 Page Data 3. B Page Table 1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. Note: If the B, E, F Page data has been initialized, “Modification (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) of B, E, F, 7 Page Data” and following adjustments need Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. to be performed again. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) 1) Modification of B, E, F, 7 page data Address Initial value Remark 2) Video system adjustments 3) Camera system adjustments 00 Fixed data-2 01 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Adjusting page F Adjusting Address 10 to FF Adjusting page E 4. E Page Table Adjusting Address 00 to FF Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Adjusting page B Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. Adjusting Address 00 to FF (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Adjusting page 7 Address Initial value Remark Adjusting Address 00 to FF 00 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Initializing Method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012600 FF3601 FF Press PAUSE button. 4 6 02 01 Check the data changes to “01”. 5 6 03 → 05 (FD87), 00 (FD92) 6 6 00 2D7601 2D Press PAUSE button. 8 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Perform “Modification of B, E, F, 7 page Data”. 2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data If the B, E, F, 7 Page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input. Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate. 3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. 4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value. Processing after Completing Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page data Order Page Address Data Procedure1200 292201 29 Press PAUSE button. 5-10, 5. F Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Initial value Initial value Address Remark Address Remark FD87 FD92 FD87 FD92 00 to 0F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 45 D5 D5 10 to 13 Fixed data-2 46 FE FE Color reproduction adj. 14 12 1C 47 73 73 15 A8 94 48 45 45 16 18 26 49 to 4C Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 17 C5 EC 4D 28 28 Strobe white balance adj. 18 12 13 4E 78 78 19 C9 B9 White balance ND filter compensation4F 00 1A 00 00 (FD92) 1B 00 00 50 00 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) (FD87) 1C 00 00 51 03 03 1D 00 00 Flange back adj. 52 E9 1E 41 46 53 63 Color reproduction adj. (ND filter ON) 1F 00 00 54 83 (FD92) 20 20 20 55 D5 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) (FD87) 21 20 20 56 FE 22 20 20 57 73 23 44 44 58 45 24 0A 0A 59 00 00 Auto white balance standard data input 25 00 00 5A 14 14 Mechanical shutter adj. 26 69 6E Light level adj. 5B Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 27 Fixed data-2 5C 63 63 28 73 80 5D 83 83 Color reproduction adj. 29 4B 36 5E 03 03 Light level adj. 2A 45 38 5F E9 E9 F No. standard data input 2B 3E 37 60 63 Color reproduction adj. (ND filter ON) 2C 3B 38 61 83 (FD92) 2D Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 62 03 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) (FD87) 2E 7C 7E 63 E9 Hall adj. 2F 99 96 64 10 10 Strobe white balance adj. 30 Fixed data-2 65 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 31 to 33 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) Video burst level adj. (FD92) 66 61 61 34 15 15 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) (FD87) Hall adj. 35 7D 7D 67, 68 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 36 to 39 Fixed data-2 69 00 02 3A 2F 2F 6A AD 60 Strobe white balance adj. 3B 37 37 6B 00 00 Auto white balance standard data input 3C 40 40 6C 0B 0B 3D D0 D0 6D C2 C2 3E Fixed data-2 6E 09 09 3F B5 B5 6F 42 42 Auto white balance adj. 40 43 43 70 06 06 Mechanical shutter adj. 41 03 03 71 C2 C2 42 E9 E9 72 05 05 Color reproduction adj. 43 63 63 73 C2 C2 44 83 83 74 04 04 5-11, Initial value Address Remark FD87 FD92 75 C2 C2 76 33 33 77 33 33 78 33 33 79 33 33 7A 33 33 Mechanical shutter adj. 7B 33 33 7C 33 33 7D 33 33 7E 33 33 7F 33 33 80 00 00 Auto white balance adj. Video sync level adj. (FD92) 81 5A 56 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) (FD87) 82 to 9F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) A0 00 00 A1 00 00 Mixed color cancel adj. A2 00 00 A3 00 00 A4 to AF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) B0 to FF Fixed data-2 5-12, 6. 7 Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Address Initial value Remark Address Initial value Remark 00 to 5F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 8E 0F 60 0F 8F FF 61 FF 90 0F 62 0F 91 FF 63 FF 92 0F 64 0F 93 FF 65 FF 94 0F 66 0F 95 FF 67 FF 96 0F 68 0F 97 FF 69 FF 98 0F CCD white defect compensation 6A 0F 99 FF 6B FF 9A 0F 6C 0F 9B FF 6D FF 9C 0F 6E 0F 9D FF 6F FF 9E 0F 70 0F 9F FF 71 FF A0 0F 72 0F A1 FF 73 FF A2 0F 74 0F CCD black defect compensation A3 FF 75 FF A4 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 76 0F 77 FF 78 0F 79 FF 7A 0F 7B FF 7C 0F 7D FF 7E 0F 7F FF 80 0F 81 FF 82 0F 83 FF 84 0F 85 FF 86 0F 87 FF 88 0F 89 FF 8A 0F CCD white defect compensation 8B FF 8C 0F 8D FF 5-13, 1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 2. Video Burst Level Adjustment (FD92) 1. Video Sync Level Adjustment (FD92) Adjust the burst level of the composite video signal output. Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output. Mode PLAY Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack (75 Ω terminated) (75 Ω terminated) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page F Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 66 Adjustment Address 81 Specified Value A = 286 ± 10 mVp-p (NTSC) Specified Value A = 286 ± 5 mVp-p (NTSC) A = 300 ± 12 mVp-p (PAL) A = 300 ± 6 mVp-p (PAL) Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 011001 0125F1 0425F1 04 Change the data and set the Change the data and set the3F66 burst level (A) to the3F81 sync level (A) to the specified specified value. value. 4 Press PAUSE button 4 Press PAUSE button Processing after Completing Adjustments: Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 0015F1 002001 002001 00

A A

H H Fig. 5-1-11 Fig. 5-1-12 5-14, 1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat- isfied. Data setting during camera system adjustment Perform the following data setting before the camera system ad- justments. • MVC-FD87: US, Canadian, Korea, Japanese MVC-FD92 Data setting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012E43 10 Press PAUSE button. 3 E 8F 00 Press PAUSE button. 4 B 67 00 Press PAUSE button. After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012E43 08 Press PAUSE button. 3 E 8F 11 Press PAUSE button. 4 B 67 85 Press PAUSE button. 5 0 01 00 • MVC-FD87: AEP, UK, E, Houg Kong, Australian Data setting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012D63 00 Press PAUSE button. 3 0 01 00 4 Turn off the HOLD switch. 5 Turn off the POWER switch. 6 Turn on the HOLD switch. 7 Turn on the POWER switch. 8 E 43 10 Press PAUSE button. 9 E 8F 00 Press PAUSE button. 10 B 67 00 Press PAUSE button. After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data setting: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 012E43 08 Press PAUSE button. 3 E 8F 11 Press PAUSE button. 4 B 67 85 Press PAUSE button. 5 D 63 20 Press PAUSE button. 6 0 01 00 7 Trun off the POWER switch. 5-15, 1. HALL Adjustment Processing after Completing Adjustment: For detecting the position of lens iris, adjust the HALL AMP gain Order Page Address Data Procedure and offset. 1 0 03 00 Mode CAMERA2601 00 Press PAUSE button. Subject Not required3695 00 Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 2) 4 6 94 00 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander55F1 00 Adjustment PageF6D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Address 2E, 2F, 34, 35 Release the data setting Specified Value 13 to 17 during IRIS OPEN 7 performed at step 4 . 7B to 7F during IRIS CLOSE (Refer to page 5-15) Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 8 0 01 00 If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 2: The right 2 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the adjusting remote commander. 1:00:XX Displayed data Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 6 94 156695 7D7601 6D Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 8 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 9 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 2E, 2F, 34 and 35. Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1003 032601 01 Press PAUSE button. Check that the displayed data31(Note 2) during IRIS OPEN satisfies the specified value. 4 6 01 03 Press PAUSE button. Check that the displayed data51(Note 2)during IRIS CLOSE satisfies the specified value. 5-16, 2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using the minipattern box) Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the The flange back of inner focus lens is adjusted automatically. If minipatternbox, so adjustment the power sup- shifted, the auto focus is disordered. ply output voltage to the specified voltage writ- ten on the sheet which is supplied with the mini- Mode CAMERA pattern box. Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter Below 3 cm for minipattern box (Note 1) Minipattern box Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD Measuring Instrument screen Camera Adjustment Page F Camera Adjustment Address 14 to 25 table Note 1: Dark Siemens star chart. Regulated power supply Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Output voltage : Specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Output current : more than 3.5 A Preparations before adjustments: 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following fig- Red (+) ure. Note 3: The attachment lenses are not used. Black (–) Note 4: Take care not to hit the mini-pattern box when Yellow (SENS +) extending the lens. 2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and White (SENS –) Need not connected the front of lens of camera is less than 3 cm. Black (GND) 3) Make the height of minipattern box and the camera equal. 4) Check the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the Fig. 5-1-13 specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc. 5) Check that the center of Siemens star chart meets the center of Adjusting method: shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE end respectively. Order Page Address Data Procedure 6) Check that the data on page: F, address: 14 to 25 are initial1001 01 value (See table below). 2 5 F1 FF Data Data Address Address3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. FD87 FD92 FD87 FD92 Perform “Data setting during 14 12 1C 1D 00 00 4 camerasystem adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 15 A8 94 1E 41 465601 13 Press PAUSE button. 16 18 26 1F 00 006601 27 Press PAUSE button. (Note 5) 17 C5 EC 20 20 207602 Check the data changes to “01”. 18 12 13 21 20 20 Check the data 19 C9 B9 22 20 20 FD87: Upper data: below A 1A 00 00 23 44 448F23 Lower data: below A 1B 00 00 24 0A 0A FD92: Upper data: below 6 1C 00 00 25 00 00 Lower data: below 6 Check the data9F24 FD87: below 08 FD92: below 07 Note 5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 14 to 25. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 003D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 4 performed at step 4 . (Refer to page 5-15) 5 0 01 00 6 Perform“Flange Back Check”. 5-17, 3. Flange Back Adjustment Adjusting method: (Using the flange back adjustment chart subject Order Page Address Data Procedure more than 500 m away) The flange back of inner focus lens is adjusted automatically. If1001 01 shifted, the auto focus is disordered. 2 5 F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 3-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) Perform “Data setting during Mode CAMERA 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) Subject Flange back adjustment chart (2.0 m from the front of lens) 5 6 01 13 Press PAUSE button. (Luminance: 300 to 400 lux) 6 6 01 15 Press PAUSE button. (Note 2) Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD7602 Check the data changes to “01”. Measuring Instrument screen Check the data Adjustment Page F FD87: Upper data: belowA8F23 Lower data: below A Adjustment Address 14 to 25 FD92: Upper data: below 6 Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Lower data: below 6 If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Check the data9F24 FD87: below 08 Preparations before adjustments: FD92: below 07 1) Place the Flange back adjustment chart 2.0 m from the front of the lens. Note 2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to 2) Check that the center of Flange back adjustment chart meets page: F, address: 14 to 25. the center of shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE end respectively. Processing after Completing Adjustment: 3) Check that the data on page: F, address: 14 to 25 are initial Order Page Address Data Procedure value (See table below). 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. Data Data25F1 00 Address Address FD87 FD92 FD87 FD923D63 00 Press PAUSE button. 14 12 1C 1D 00 00 Release the data setting 15 A8 94 1E 41 46 performed at step 4 . (Refer to page 5-15) 16 18 26 1F 00 005001 00 17 C5 EC 20 20 20 Perform“Flange Back Adjust- 18 12 13 21 20 20 6 ment (2)”. 19 C9 B9 22 20 20 1A 00 00 23 44 44 1B 00 00 24 0A 0A 1C 00 00 25 00 00 5-18, 3-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) Perform this adjustment after performing “Flange Back Adjust- ment (1)”. Mode CAMERA Subject Subject more than 500 m away (Subjects with clear contrast such as buildings, etc.) Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD Measuring Instrument screen Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 14 to 25 Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Set the zoom lens to the TELE end andexpose a subject that is more than 500 m away (subject with clear contrast such as building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than500 m away should not be in the screen. 1 0 01 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camerasystem adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 6 01 13 Press PAUSE button. Place the ND filter on the 6 lens so that the optimum image is obtain. 7 6 01 29 Press PAUSE button. (Note 1) 8 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data FD87: Upper data: belowA9F23 Lower data: below A FD92: Upper data: below 6 Lower data: below 6 Check the data 10 F 24 FD87: below 08 FD92: below 07 Note 1: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 14 to 25. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 003D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 4 performed at step 4 . (Refer to page 5-15) 5 0 01 00 6 Perform“Flange Back Check”. 5-19, 4. Flange Back Check 5. F No. Standard Data Input Compensate the unevenness of the iris meter sensitivity. Mode CAMERA Subject Siemens star Mode CAMERA (2.0 m from the front of the lens) Subject Clear chart (Luminance: approx. 200 lux) (Color reproduction adjustment Measurement Point Check operation on the LCD frame with the zoom lens at WIDE end) Measuring Instrument screen Adjustment Page F Specified value Focused at the TELE end and WIDE end Adjustment Address 29 to 2C Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Checking method: If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Note 2: “F No. Standard Data Input” is available only once after Order Page Address Data Procedure the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again Place the Siemens star 2.0 m if the adjustment is retried. from the front of the lens. To open the IRIS , decrease Adjusting method: 1 the luminous intensity to the Order Page Address Data Procedure Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the Shoot the Clear chart with1 image. the zoom WIDE end. 3 0 01 012001 0145F1 FF35F1 FF5D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 4 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during Perform “Data setting during 6 camera system adjustment”. 5 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) (Refer to page 5-15) Shoot the Siemens star with6E51 Note down the data. 7 the zoom TELE end. 7 E 51 FF Press PAUSE button. Check that the lens is Press PAUSE button. 88601 BBfocused. (Note 3) 9 6 2C 01 Check the data changes to9602 While observe the LCD “01”. 10 screen, change the zoom to Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: the WIDE end and check that F, address: 29 to 2C. the lens is focused. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 1 6 2C 00 Set data noted down at step 6, 2 E 5125F1 00 and press PAUSE button. 3 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. 3 5 F1 00 Release the data setting4D63 00 Press PAUSE button. 4 performed at step 6. Release the data setting (Refer to page 5-15) 5 performed at step 5. 5 0 01 00 (Refer to page 5-15) 6 0 01 00 5-20, 6. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and com- pensate the exposure. Mode CAMERA Subject Clear chart (10 cm from the front of the lens) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 5A, 6C to 7F Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Shoot the Clear chart with the zoom WIDE end. 2 0 01 0135F1 FF4D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 5 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 6 6 01 AD Press PAUSE button (Note 2) Check the data changes to7602 “01”. Check the data. 8 6 AB 00 : Normal 01 to FF : Defective Note 2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 5A and 6C to 7F. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 003D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 4 performed at step 5. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 0 01 00 5-21, 7. Picture Frame Setting How to reset the zoom and focus when they deviated: Mode CAMERA Order Page Address Data Procedure1690 XL (Note 2) Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment2691 XH (Note 2) frame) 3 6 92 YL (Note 3) Measurement Point FD87: LCD screen and pin ws of4693 YH (Note 3) CN803 on FC-85 board5601 79 Press PAUSE button. FD92: Video terminal of A/V OUT jack 6 Wait for 1 second. (75 Ω terminated) 7 6 2C 01 Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor or8601 00 Press PAUSE button. LCD screen Note 2: The data noted dowm at step 8 of “Setting method”. Specified Value A=B, C=D, E=F Note 3: The data noted dowm at step 10 of “Setting method”. Note 1: Displayed data of the page 1 of adjusting remote com- mander. 1:XX:XX Check on the oscilloscope XL or YL data XH or YH data 1. Horizontal period FD87 A=B C=D Setting method: BCADOrder Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) FD92 A=B C=D Adjust the zoom and the cameraBC5direction, and set to the pictureADframe to the specified position. Mark the position of the picture frame on the TV monitor or LCD screen, and adjust the 6 picture frame to this position in following adjustment using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”. 7 0 03 18 Fig. 5-1-14 Note down the XH and XL81data. (Note 1) 2. Vertical period9003 22 E E=F F Note down the YH and YL 10 1 data. (Note 1) 11 0 03 00 12 5 F1 00 V 13 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Fig. 5-1-15 Release the data setting 14 performed at step 4. Check on the TV monitor or LCD screen (Refer to page 5-15) 15 0 01 00 Color bar chart picture frame TV monitor or LCD screen picture frame Fig. 5-1-16 5-22, 8. Light Level Adjustment and ND Shutter Check Processing after Completing Adjustment: Adjust the standard LV value. Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA1003 00 Subject Clear chart2601 00 Press PAUSE button. (Color reproduction adjustment35F1 00 frame) 4 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 2) Release the data setting Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander 5 performed at step 4 . Adjustment Page F (Refer to page 5-15) Adjustment Address 26, 286001 00 Specified Value AE level 1: 0FE0 to 1020 AE level 2: Below 1100 Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 2: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the adjusting remote commander. 1:XX:XX Displayed data Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 6 01 0D Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 6 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 7 0 03 06 Check that the displayed data81(Note 2) satisfies the AE level 1 specified value. FD87: Proceed to “Processing after 9 Completing Adjustments”. FD92: Proceed to step 10 to 14. 10 E 41 6B Press PAUSE button. 11 6 1C 03 Check that the displayed data 12 1 (Note 2) satisfies the AE level 2 specified value. 13 6 1C 00 14 E 41 6A Press PAUSE button. Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 26 and 28. 5-23, 9. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment 10. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input To perform mixed color cancel adjustment based on data of each Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K. color in color bar. Mode CAMERA Mode CAMERA Subject Clear chart Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment (Color reproduction adjustment frame) frame) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 3A to 3D, 59 Adjustment Address A0 to A3 Note 1: Perform “Light Level Adjustment” and “Mixed Color Note 1: Perform “Light Level Adjustment” before this Cancel Adjustment” before this adjustment. adjustment. Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. Note 2: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” Note 3: “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” is available after this adjustment. only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power Note 3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 011001 0125F1 FF25F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 3 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) (Refer to page 5-15) 5 6 01 11 Press PAUSE button. 5 6 01 D7 Press PAUSE button. 6 6 01 0B Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) Press PAUSE button. (Note6601 D57602 Check the data changes to 4) “01”. 7 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to F, address: 3A to 3D and 59. page: F, address: A0 to A3. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 0025F1 003D63 00 Press PAUSE button. 3 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 4 performed at step 4. Release the data setting (Refer to page 5-15) 4 performed at step 4 . 5 0 01 00 (Refer to page 5-15) 6 Perform “Auto White5 0 01 00 Balance Adjustment”. 5-24, 11. Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation (FD92) Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data with Built-in ND filter. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor. Mode CAMERA Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 4F, 50 Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” be- fore this adjustment. Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 3: “Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation” is avail- able only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 F 27 Note down the data. 6 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. 7 6 1C 03 Press PAUSE button. 8 Wait for 1 second. 9 6 01 11 Press PAUSE button. 10 6 01 09 Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) 11 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 4F and 50. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 6 1C 00 Set the data noted down at3F27 step 5, and press PAUSE button. 4 5 F1 005D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 6 performed at step 4 . (Refer to page 5-15) 7 0 01 00 5-25, 12. Auto White Balance Adjustment Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility Check that the displayed data will be poor. 13 1 (Note 3) satisfied the R ratio specified value. Mode CAMERA 14 0 03 05 Subject Clear chart Check that the displayed data (Color reproduction adjustment 15 1 (Note 3) satisfied the B ratio frame) specified value. Filter Filter C14 for color temperature Note 5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: correction F, address: 3F, 40 and 80. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 3) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Processing after Completing Adjustment: Adjustment Page F Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjustment Address 3F, 40, 801003 00 Specified Value FD87: 2 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. R ratio: 2760 to 28A0 49 B ratio: 5F60 to 60A0 4A Set the data noted down at step FD92: 3 F 4B 7, and press PAUSE button. R ratio: 2760 to 28A0 4C B ratio: 5E60 to 5FA045F1 00 Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” be- 5 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. fore this adjustment. Release the data setting Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. 6 performed at step 5. If not, turn the power of unit OFF/ON. (Refer to page 5-15) Note 3: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the adjusting remote commander. 7 0 01 00 1:XX:XX Displayed data Note 4: “Auto White Balance Adjustment” is available only once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Place the C14 filter on the lens. 2 0 01 0135F1 FF4D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 5 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 6 6 01 A7 Press PAUSE button. 4A7FNote down the data. 4B 4C 49 28 Press PAUSE button. 4A 008F4B → 60 (FD87), 5F (FD92) 4C 009601 A5 Press PAUSE button. (Note 5) Check the data changes to 10 6 02 “01”. 11 6 01 3F Press PAUSE button. 12 0 03 04 5-26, 13. Color Reproduction Adjustment 13-2. Color Reproduction Adjustment (With ND Filter) Adjust the color separation matrix coefficient so that proper color (FD92) reproduction is produced. Mode CAMERA 13-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment (Without ND Filter) Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment Mode CAMERA frame) Subject Color bar chart Adjustment Page F (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Address 51 to 58, 60 to 63 Adjustment Page F Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” and “Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation” before Adjustment Address 41 to 48, 5C to 5F this adjustment. Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If before this adjustment. not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Note 3: “Color Reproduction Adjustment” is available only once If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on Note 3: “Color Reproduction Adjustment” is available only once again if the adjustment is retried. after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, then on again if the adjustment is retried. Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure25F1 FF1001 013D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 FF Perform “Data setting during3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. 4 camera system adjustment”. Perform “Data setting during (Refer to page 5-15) 4 camera system adjustment”. 5 F 27 Note down the data. (Refer to page 5-15) 6 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. 5 6 01 AB Press PAUSE button. 7 6 1C 036612 80 Press PAUSE button. 8 Wait for 1 second. 7 Wait for 1 second. 9 6 01 C3 Press PAUSE button. 8 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. 10 6 12 80 Press PAUSE button. 9 Wait for 2 seconds. 11 Wait for 1 seconds. 10 6 01 A9 Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) 12 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. 11 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 13 Wait for 2 seconds. Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to 14 6 01 C1 Press PAUSE button. (Note 4) page: F, address: 41 to 48 and 5C to 5F. 15 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Processing after Completing Adjustment: Note 4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to Order Page Address Data Procedure page: F, address: 51 to 58 and 60 to 63. 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 2 5 F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 4 performed at step 4 . (Refer to page 5-15) 5 0 01 00 Perform “Color Reproduc- 6 tion Check”. 5-27, Processing after Completing Adjustment: 14. Color Reproduction Check Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA1601 00 Press PAUSE button. Subject Color bar chart261C 00 (Color reproduction adjustment Set the data noted down at frame) 3 F 27 step 5, and press PAUSE Measurement Point FD87: LCD screen button. FD92: Video terminal of A/V45F1 FF OUT jack (75 Ω terminated) 5 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. Measuring Instrument LCD screen or Vectorscope Release the data setting 6 performed at step 4 . Specified Value FD87: (Refer to page 5-15) Shoot the color bar chart and save it on a FD. Play back the7001 00 recorded FD and compare it on a Perform “Color Reproduc- PC display with the color bar 8 tion Check”. play back of the Alignment FD. FD92: All color luminance points should settle within each color reproduction frame. PC: Personal computer FD: Floppy disk Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 6 10 016E52 Note down the data. 7 E 52 0A Press PAUSE button. 8 6 01 0F Press PAUSE button. 9 6 12 80 Press PAUSE button. 10 Wait for 1 second. 11 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. 12 Wait for 2 seconds. FD87: Compare the color bar on the LCD screen with “Camera color bars” in Alignment disk to make sure that the color of both color bars is same. FD92: Check the each color luminance point is each color reproduction frame. (ND OFF) FD87: Proceed to “Processing after 14 Completing Adjustments”. FD92: Proceed to step 15 to 25. 15 F 27 Note down the data. 16 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. 17 6 1C 03 5-28, Order Page Address Data Procedure For NTSC mode 18 Wait for 1 second. R-Y 19 6 12 80 Press PAUSE button. 20 Wait for 1 second. 21 6 12 00 Press PAUSE button. R MG 22 Wait for 2 seconds. Check the each color 23 luminance point is each color reproduction frame.(ND ON) YE Set the data noted down at 24 F 27 step 15, and press PAUSE B-Y button. B 25 6 1C 00 Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure CYG1601 00 Press PAUSE button. Burst position2610 00 Set the data noted down at3E52 step 6, and press PAUSE Fig. 5-1-17 button. 4 5 F1 FF5D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Release the data setting 6 performed at step 4 . For PAL mode (Refer to page 5-15) 7 0 01 00 R-Y Burst position

MG R YE

B-Y

B CY G

Fig. 5-1-18 5-29,

Ver 1.1 2001. 06

15. Auto White Balance Check Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA INDOOR data check (with ND filter) (FD92) Subject Clear chart 22 F 27 Note down the data. (Color reproduction adjustment 23 F 27 80 Press PAUSE button. frame) 24 6 1C 03 Measurement Point Displayed data of Video terminal 25 Wait for 1 second. of Page: 1 A/V OUT jack (Note 2) (75 Ω terminated) 26 0 03 04 (FD92) Check that the displayed data Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote Vectorscope 27 1 (Note 2) satisfied the R ratio commander (FD92) specified value. Specified Value R ratio: Fig. 5-1-19 28 0 03 05 3E00 to 4200 (A) and (B) Check that the displayed data B ratio: 29 1 (Note 2) satisfied the B ratio 3E00 to 4200 specified value. Note 1: Refer to “Picture Frame Setting” for XH, XL, YH and Set the data noted down at YL. 30 F 27 step 22, and press PAUSE Note 2: The right 4 digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the button. adjusting remote commander. INDOOR luminance point check (FD92) 1:XX:XX Displayed data 31 6 1C 00 32 0 03 00 Checking method: Check that the center of the Order Page Address Data Procedure 33 white luminance point within the circle shown Check that the lens is not 1 Fig. 5-1-19 (A).covered with either filter. OUTDOOR luminance check (FD92) 2 0 01 01 Place the C14 filter on the35F1 FF 34 lens. 4 D 63 40 Press PAUSE button. 35 E 4B Note down the data. Perform “Data setting during 36 E 4B 20 Press PAUSE button. 5 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 37 6 01 3F Press PAUSE button. 6 6 90 XL (Note 1) Check that the center of the white luminance point settles7691 XH (Note 1) 38 in the circle shown8692 YL (Note 1) Fig. 5-1-19 (B). 9 6 93 YH (Note 1) Set the data noted down at 39 E 4B 10 6 6C 01 step 35, and press PAUSE button. 11 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 12 Wait for 1 second. Processing after Completing Adjustment: 13 6 2C 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure INDOOR data check (without ND filter) 1 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 14 E 52 Note down the data. 2 6 2C 00 15 E 52 0E Press PAUSE button. 3 6 6C 00 16 6 01 0F Press PAUSE button. Set the data noted down at 17 0 03 044E52 step 14, and press PAUSE Check that the displayed data button. 18 1 (Note 2)satisfied the R ratio55F1 FF specified value. 6 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. 19 0 03 05 Release the data setting Check that the displayed data 7 performed at step 5. 20 1 (Note 2) satisfied the B ratio (Refer to page 5-15) specified value. 8 0 01 00 FD87: Proceed to “Processing after 21 Completing Adjustment”. FD92: Proceed to INDOOR data check (with ND filter). 5-30, R-Y B-Y 4 mm 4 mm Fig. 5-1-19 (A) R-Y 1 mm B-Y 2.5 mm 8 mm 8 mm Fig. 5-1-19 (B) 5-31,

Ver 1.1 2001. 06

16. Strobe White Balance Adjustment Order Page Address Data Procedure Adjust the white balance when the strobe light flashed. 27 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Mode CAMERA FD87: Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3) Proceed to “Strobe Light (1.0 m from the front of lens) Level and White Balance Check”. Adjustment Page F 28 FD92: Adjustment Address 4D, 4E, 64, 69, 6A, 6B Proceed to “Processing after Note 1: Perform “Hall Adjustment”, “Flange Back Adjustment”, Completing Adjustment”. “Light Level Adjustment” and “Auto White Balance Ad- Note 6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to justment” before this adjustment. page: F, address: 4D, 4E, 64, 69, 6A and 6B. Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the flash adjustment box. Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box”. Processing after Completing Adjustment: (See page 5-7) Note 4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Order Page Address Data Procedure If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON. 1 6 10 00 Note 5: “Strobe White Balance Adjustment” is available only Set the data noted down at once after the power is turned on. Turn the power off, 2 E 64 step 9, and press PAUSE then on again if the adjustment is retried. button. Switch setting: Set the data noted down at3 E 63 1) FLASH ... ON step 7, and press PAUSE button. Adjusting method: Perform “Strobe Light Level 4 and White Balance Check” Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) FD87: 5 Proceed to setp 11 to 28. FD92: Proceed to setp 6 to 28. 6 6 10 027E63 00 Note down the data. 8 E 63 FF Press PAUSE button. 9 E 64 Note down the data. 10 E 64 47 Press PAUSE button. 11 6 90 00 12 6 91 00 13 6 92 00 14 6 93 → 80 (FD87), 60 (FD92) 15 6 6C 01 16 6 2C 01 17 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 18 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button. 19 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 20 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 21 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 22 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button. 23 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. 24 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 25 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 26 6 01 B9 Press PAUSE button. (Note 6) 5-32, 17. Strobe Light Level and White Balance Check Processing after Completing Adjustment: Check the light level regulation and the white balance when the Order Page Address Data Procedure strobe light flashed. 1 0 03 00 Mode CAMERA2601 00 Press PAUSE button. Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3) 3 6 2C 00 (1.0 m from the front of lens) 4 6 6C 00 Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 15693 00 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander65F1 00 Specified value Y level data: 60 to 947D63 00 Press PAUSE button. R-Y level data: FA to FF or 00 to 06 (Note 4) Release the data setting B-Y level data: FA to FF or 00 to 06 performed at step 4 of (Note 4) 8 “Strobe White Balance Adjustment”. Note 1: Perform “Hall Adjustment”, “Flange Back Adjustment”, (Refer to page 5-15) “Light Level Adjustment” and “Auto White Balance Ad- justment” before this checking. 9 0 01 00 Perform this checking successively after performing “Strobe White Balance Adjustment”. (Do not turn the power of the unit OFF) Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the flash adjustment box. Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box”. (See page 5-7) Note 4: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the adjusting remote commander. 1:XX:XX B-Y level data R-Y level data Note 5: Displayed data of page: F, address: 64 of the adjusting remote commander. F:XX:64 Y level data Note 6: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. Checking method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1601 79 Press PAUSE button. 2 6 01 67 Press PAUSE button. 3 Check the flashing of strobe light. 4 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check that the data satisfies5F64 the Y level data satisfied value. (Note 5) 6 0 03 02 Check the R-Y and B-Y level71data (Note 4) satisfies the specified value. 5-33, 18. CCD Black Defect Compensation Processing after Completing Adjustment: Mode CAMERA Order Page Address Data Procedure Subject Clear chart Set data noted down at step1 F DF (25 cm from the front of lens) 5, and press PAUSE button. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, 2 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. address: 55362C 00 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander4630 00 Adjustment Page7566C 00 Adjustment Address 60 to 876691 00 Note 1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the75F1 00 clear chart. 8 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. Note 2: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the Release the data setting screen. 9 performed at step 4. (Refer to page 5-15) Adjusting method: 10 0 01 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 F DF Note down the data. 6 F DF 4C Press PAUSE button. 7 6 2C 018690 009691 03 10 6 92 00 11 6 93 00 12 6 6C 01 13 6 01 79 Press PAUSE button. 14 6 30 01 15 Wait for 4 seconds. 16 6 01 8D Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 17 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 18 6 55 00 to 0A : Normal 0B to FF : Defective 19 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 20 F DF 5A Press PAUSE button. 21 6 01 89 Press PAUSE button. 22 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 23 6 55 00: Normal 01 to FF: Defective Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 7, address: 60 to 87. 5-34, 19. CCD White Defect Compensation Processing after Completing Adjustment: Order Page Address Data Procedure Mode CAMERA Set data noted down at step Subject Clear chart1FDE 5, and press PAUSE button. (25 cm from the front of lens) Set data noted down at step Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, 2 F E3 7, and press PAUSE button. address: 553601 00 Press PAUSE button. Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander45F1 00 Adjustment Page75D63 00 Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Address 88 to A3 Release the data setting Note 1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the 6 performed at step 4. clear chart. (Refer to page 5-15) Note 2: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the screen. 7 0 01 00 Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 FF3D63 40 Press PAUSE button. Perform “Data setting during 4 camera system adjustment”. (Refer to page 5-15) 5 F DE Note down the data. 6 F DE 1E Press PAUSE button. 7 F E3 Note down the data. 8 F E3 18 Press PAUSE button. 9 6 01 8B Press PAUSE button. (Note 3) 10 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 11 6 55 00 to 7F: Normal 80 to FF: Defective 12 6 01 00 Press PAUSE button. 13 F DE 0F Press PAUSE button. 14 F E3 A0 Press PAUSE button. 15 6 01 87 Press PAUSE button. 16 6 02 Check the data changes to “01”. Check the data. 17 6 55 00: Normal 01 to FF: Defective Note 3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 7, address: 88 to A3. 5-35, 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS [Adjusting connector] Before perform the LCD system adjustments, check that the Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are sat- concentrated in CN803 of the FC-85 board. isfied. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-12 jig (J-6082- 436-A). Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven with high volt- The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN803. age AC power. Therefore, do not touch the back light directly, otherwise you will feel an electric shock. Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name Note 2: Taken an extreme care not to destroy the liquid crystal 1 FDDRF_B 13 MAKER_RECOG display module by static electricity when replacing it. 2 FDDRF_A 14 PF7/MS_SCLK Note 3: Set the LCD BRIGHT (Menu display) to the center. 3 INDEX 15 TXD/MS_BS Data setting during LCD system adjustment 4 REG_GND 16 RXD/MS_DIO Perform the following data setting before the LCD system adjust- 5 N. C. 17 RESET/XMS_IN ments. 6 TRACK_00 18 HI_VDD/D_3.2 V • MVC-FD87: AEP, UK, E, Hong Kong, Australian 7 HSY EVF_BL+ (N.C.)/ Data setting method: 198 COM C_OUT Order Page Address Data Procedure 9 VG 20 EVF_BL_4.75 (N.C.) 1 0 01 01 10 HI_UNREG 21 EVF_VG (N.C.) 2 D 63 00 Press PAUSE button. 11 LANC_IN EVF_VCO (N.C.)/ 3 0 01 00 12 LANC_OUT Y_OUT 4 Turn off the HOLD switch. Note: CN803 Pin Name 5 Turn off the POWER switch. A/B 6 Turn on the HOLD switch. A: FD92 B: FD87 7 Turn on the POWER switch. [LCD type check] After completing the LCD system adjustments, release the By measuring the resistor value between Pin qd of CN803 and data setting: Pin 4 of CN803, the type LCD can be discriminated. Order Page Address Data Procedure FC-85 board CN8031001 01 Resistor value LCD type2D63 20 Press PAUSE button. 10 kΩ TYPE SA3001 00 22 kΩ TYPE ST 4 Turn off the POWER switch. Volt ohm meter 22 qd pin 4 pin CPC cover FC-85 board CN803 CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A) Fig. 5-1-20 5-36, Alignment disk (Disk-1, Disk-2) 1. LCD Initial Data Input (A set of alignment disks consists of two disks as a pair.) Disk-1: 8-967-990-01 Mode PLAY (TFD2-1 (+)) (+17.5 µm) Signal Arbitrary Disk-2: 8-967-990-11 (TFD2-2 (–)) (–17.5 µm) Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D0 to D9, DC to DF [Common signals in the disks] Data Code Signal Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. MVC-001C.JPG Color bars 2) Select page: D, and enter the data given in the following table. MVC-002M.JPG Monoscope MVC-003V.JPG V. COM adjustment signal Note: Press the PAUSE button each time the data are set, as the data are written to non-volatile memory (EEPROM). MVC-004W.JPG 100% white MVC-005H.JPG 50% white Data Address Remark MVC-006T.JPG Stair-step signal of 10 steps TYPE ST TYPE SA MVC-007R.JPG Red single color D0 74 80 Bright Adjustment MVC-008G.JPG Green single color D1 74 74 Color Adjustment MVC-009B.JPG Blue single color D2 A8 A8 White Blance Adjustment MVC-010D.JPG Camera color bars D3 88 88 MVC-011N.JPG Camera monoscope D4 C0 C8 Contrast Adjustment D5 90 98 Black Limit Adjustment • Contents of alignment disk-1 (Common signal) + (+17.5 µm alignment) D6 84 90 VG Center Adjustment • Contents of alignment disk-2 D7 78 70 VCO Adjustment (NTSC) (Common signal) + (–17.5 µm alignment) D8 75 98 V-COM Adjustment D9 6E 6E Fixed value DC B9 B9 DD 98 90 VCO Adjustment (PAL) DE 33 33 Fixed value DF 00 00 Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 5-37, 2. VCO Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred. Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary CH1 Measurement Point CH1: Pin 7 of CN803 (HDO) CH2: CH2 FD87: Pin ws of CN803 (Y_OUT) FD92: Video terminal of A/V OUT jack H (75 Ω terminated) magnified Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D7 (NTSC) DD (PAL) Specified Value NTSC: T = 2.10 ± 0.1 µs (TYPE ST) T = 2.05 ± 0.1 µs (TYPE SA) PAL: CH1 T = 3.20 ± 0.1 µs (TYPE ST) T = 3.55 ± 0.1 µs (TYPE SA) Menu setting (FD92): 1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu CH2 ... NTSC (NTSC mode)

T

(This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don’t set the menu setting to “PAL” ) T: Between the center of HDO signal rising and Adjusting method: VIDEO SYNC signal rising Order Page Address Data Procedure Fig. 5-1-211001 01 Change the data and set the2DD7 phase difference (T) to the NTSC specified value. 3 D D7 Press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the4DDD phase difference (T) to the PAL specified value. 5 D DD Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 00 5-38, 3. Black Limit Adjustment (FC-85 Board) 4. Bright Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the maximum amplitude of the RGB decoder for driving the Set the amplitude of the RGB decoder for driving the LCD to the LCD to the specified value. specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). (whitish). Mode PLAY Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 (COM) (COM) Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D5 Adjustment Address D0 Specified Value A = 8.20 ± 0.1 Vp-p (TYPE ST) Specified Value A = 7.80 ± 0.1 Vp-p (TYPE ST) A = 7.40 ± 0.1 Vp-p (TYPE SA) A = 7.00 ± 0.1 Vp-p (TYPE SA) Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 011001 0125F1 0325F1 03 Set the data. Change the data and set the3DD0 20 (Don't press PAUSE button.) 3 D D0 voltage (A) to the specified Change the data and set the value. 4 D D5 voltage (A) to the specified4DD0 Press PAUSE button. value. 5 D D5 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1 5 F1 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure2001 0015F1 002001 00 Pedestal

A A

Pedestal 2H 2H A: Between the reversed waveform peak and non-reversed A: Between the reversed waveform pedestal and non-reversed waveform peak waveform pedestal Fig. 5-1-22 Fig. 5-1-23 5-39, 5. Contrast Adjustment (FC-85 Board) 6. Color Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the Set the color saturation to the standard value. specified value. If, deviated, the color will be dark or light. If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode PLAY Signal Arbitray Mode PLAY Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) Signal Arbitrary External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) (COM) External trigger: Pin 8 of CN803 Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope (COM) Adjustment Page D Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Address D1 Adjustment Page D Specified Value A = 400 ± 50 mVp-p (TYPE ST) Adjustment Address D4 A = 350 ± 50 mVp-p (TYPE SA) Specified Value A = 2.45 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE ST) A = 2.27 ± 0.05 Vp-p (TYPE SA) Adjusting method: Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 01 Order Page Address Data Procedure25F1 041001 01 Change the data and set the25F1 032DD1 voltage (A) to the specified Change the data and set the value. 3 D D4 voltage (A) to the specified4DD1 Press PAUSE button. value. 4 D D4 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 00 Order Page Address Data Procedure2001 0015F1 002001 00 White 100% Green 10 steps peak

A A

2H Pedestal 2H A: Between the white 100% (Reference level) and green A: Between the pedestal and 10 setps peak Fig. 5-1-25 Fig. 5-1-24 5-40, 7. VG Center Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the center of VG signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN803 (VG) Measuring Instrument Digital voltmeter Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D6 Specified Value A = 7.00 ± 0.05 V (TYPE ST) A = 6.00 ± 0.05 V (TYPE SA) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 02 Change the data and set the3DD6 DC voltage (A) to the specified value. 4 D D6 Press PAUSE button. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 002001 00 5-41, 8. V-COM Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the specified value. B A If deviated, the LCD display will be move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines. A B Mode PLAY Signal ArbitraryBAMeasurement Point Check on the LCD screen Measuring InstrumentABAdjustment Page D Adjustment Address D8 Fig. 5-1-26 Specified Value The brightness difference between the section-A and section-B is minimum Note 1: Perform “Bright Adjustment” and “Contrast Adjusstment” before this adjustment. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 023210 02 Change the data so that4DD8 brightness of the section A and section B is equal. TYPE SA: Press PAUSE button, and5DD8 proceed to “Processing after Completing Adjustments”. TYPE ST: Proceed to step 6 to 11. Read the data and this data is6DD8 named Dref Convert Dref to decimal 7 notation, and obtain Dref’ (Note 2) Calculate DD8’ using 8 following equations (decimal calculation) 9 DD8’ = Dref’ – 9 10 Convert DD8’ to a hexadeci- mal number, and obtain DD8 (Note 2) 11 D D8 DD8 Press PAUSE button. Note 2: Refer to table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table” Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 002210 003001 00 5-42, 9. White Balance Adjustment (FC-85 Board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced. Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Check on the LCD screen Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D2, D3 Specified Value LCD screen must not be colored Note 1: Check the white balance only when replacing the fol- lowing parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD panel 2. Light induction plate 3. IC902 Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 0125F1 02 D2 A8 Press PAUSE button. 3 D D3 88 (Initial value) Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If not colored, 4 proceed to “Processing after Completing Adjustments”. D2 Change the data so that the5DLCD screen is not colored. D3 (Note 2) Note 2: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press the PAUSE button each time to set the data. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure15F1 002001 00 5-43,

Ver 1.1 2001. 06

1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS Adjusting method: 1. Battery Down Adjustment Order Page Address Data Procedure Set the battery end voltage. If the voltage is incorrect, the life of battery will shorten. 1 0 01 01 The image at the battery end will also be rough. Decrease the output voltage 2 of the regulated power supply Mode CAMERA so that digital voltmeter Subject Arbitrary display is 5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2, Read the data and this data is3 2 52 address: 52 named Dref Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commamder4D90 Dref Press PAUSE button. Adjustment Page D Convert Dref to decimal 5 notation and obtain Dref’. Adjustment Address 90 to 94 (Note) Calculate D91’, D92’, D93’and Connection: D94’using following equa- 1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter tions (decimal calculation). to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-1-27. 6 D91’= Dref’ + 5 D92’= Dref’ + 23 Preparations before adjustment: D93’= Dref’ + 44 1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so D94’= Dref’ + 55 that the digital voltmeter display is 6.1 ± 0.1 Vdc. 2) Turn on the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander. Convert D91’, D92’, D93’and 3) Turn on the power supply. 7 D94’to a hexadecimal number, 4) Set the CAMERA mode. and obtain D91, D92, D93 and D94. (Note) 8 D 91 D91 Press PAUSE button. 9 D 92 D92 Press PAUSE button. 10 D 93 D93 Press PAUSE button. 11 D 94 D94 Press PAUSE button. Note: Refer to table 5-2-2 “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table”. Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 00 Regulated power supply 5.55 ± 0.01 Vdc Digital voltmeter Power cord (J-6082-223-A) Fig. 5-1-27 5-44, 2. ZOOM Center Adjustment 3. Alignment Check (FDD Unit) Set normal position (center value) of ZOOM lever. Confirm that the FDD alignment is within the specifications. If deviated, reading and writing data from and to floppy disk be- Mode CAMERA come impossible. Subject Arbitrary Or compatibility of floppy disk with other machines can be lost. Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2 Mode PLAY address: 5C (Note 2) Signal Alignment disks (TFD2-1 (+)) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander and (TFD2-2 (–)): Adjustment Page D Arbitrary signal Adjustment Address 89 Measurement Point Check on LCD screen Measuring Instrument Note 1: Before adjustment, make sure that the ZOOM lever is in Specified Value The playback pictures should be mechanical center position. normal Note 2: Displayed data of page: 2, address: 5C of the adjusting remote commander. 2:XX:5C Checking method: Displayed data 1) Disconnect the adjusting remote commander. 2) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-1 (+) (+17.5 um). 3) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture Adjusting method: is normal. 4) Insert the alignment disk TFD2-2 (–) (–17.5 um). Order Page Address Data Procedure 5) Playback arbitrary signal and check that the playback picture1001 01 is normal. Read the data and this data is225C named Dref Check the data 5D to 99: Normal325C 00 to 5C and 9A to FF: Defective Press PAUSE button. 4 D 89 D89 (See table below) Dref D89 5D to 6B 6C 6C to 8A Dref 8B to 99 8A Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure1001 00 5-45, 5-2. SERVICE MODE • Changing the address 2-1. ADJUSTING REMOTE COMMANDER The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed, The adjusting remote commander is used for changing the calcu- and decreases when the REW (M) button is pressed. There lation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjust- are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF. ing remote commander performs bi-directional communication • Changing the data (Data setting) with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed, The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There in the non-volatile memory. are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF. • Writing the adjustment data 1. Used the Adjusting Remote Commander The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment 1) Connect the adjusting remote commander to the CN803 on data in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjustment data the FC-85 board via CPC-12 jig (J-6082-436-A). will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is 2) Adjust the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander not performed) to “HOLD” (SERVICE position). 3) Turn on the power with the POWER switch of the unit. 2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting Remote If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjusting re- Commander mote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-2-1. Mishandling of the adjusting remote commander may erase the correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjust- ments and new adjustment data after each adjustment. 0 : 00 : 00 Page Data Address Fig. 5-2-1 4) Operate the adjusting remote commander as follows. • Changing the page The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH + button is pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH – button is pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F. Hexadecimal0123456789ABCDEFnotation LCD Display0123456789AbcdEFDecimal notation0123456789101112131415 conversion value Table 5-2-1 5-46, 2-2. DATA PROCESS The calculation of the adjusting remote commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment data. Table 5-2-2. indicates the hexadecimal notation- the deci- mal notation, calculation table. Hexadecimal notation-Decimal notation 2 ↓ The lower digits of the0123456789ABCDEFhexadecimal notation The upper digits of the (A) (b) (c) (d) (E) (F) hexadecimal notation0012345678910 11 12 13 14 15 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 1→ B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 Note : ( ) indicate the adjusting remote control unit display. (Example) In the case that the adjusting remote control unit display are BD (bd). As the upper digit of the hexadecimal notation is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the intersection “189” of the1 and 2 in the above table is the decimal notation to be calculated. Table 5-2-2 5-47, 2-3. SERVICE MODE 3. Switch Check (1) 1. Setting the Test Mode Page 2 Address 43 Page D Address 10 Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0 Data Function 0 XPOWER SW OFF ON 00 Normal (PK-54 board S703) 01 Forced CAMERA mode power ON 1 XCAM/PLAY SW PLAY CAMERA 02 Forced PLAY mode power ON (PK-54 board S708) 03 Forced MOVIE mode power ON SHUTTR SW 2 (CONTROL SWITCH OFF ON • Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: BLOCK S001) 01. • For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory XSHUTTER LOCK SW by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote com- 3 (CONTROL SWITCH OFF ON mander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be BLOCK S001) exited even when the main power is turned off. FLOPPY DISK IN SW IN OUT • After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data (FDD UNIT) (FD87)4 of this address to “00”, and press the PAUSE button of the ad- MEMORY STICK IN SW justing remote commander. OUT IN(MS Socket) (FD92) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 2. Bit Value Discrimination 6 Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the ad- XSTILL/MOVIE SW justing remote commander for following items. Use the table be- 7 (FD92) MOVIE STILL low to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0” (PK-54 board S710) Display on the adjustilng remote commander Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 43 0 : 00 : 00 2) By discriminating the bit value of dispaly data, the state of theswitches can be discriminated. 4. Switch Check (2) (FD92) Address Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination Page 2 Address 48 bit7 to bit4 discrimination Bit Function When bit value=1 When bit value=0 Display on the Bit values DISK/XMS SW MEMORY Adjusting bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 0 FLOPPY DISK(FC-85 board S401) STICK remote or or or or commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 Using method: 000001) Select page: 2, address: 48100012) By discriminating the bit value of dispaly data, the state of the20010switches can be discriminated. 3001140100501016011070111A8100091001A(A) 1010B(b) 1011C(c) 1100D(d) 1101BE(E) 1110F(F) 1111Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjusting remote com- mander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column. 5-48, 5. Switch Check (3) Page 2 Addresses 55, 56 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, addresses: 55, 56. 2) By discriminating the dispaly data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Data Address 00 to 12 13 to 3A 3B to 62 63 to 87 88 to B3 B4 to D5 D6 to FF 55 CONTROL DOWN CONTROL UP DISPLAY VOLUME + (FD92) VOLUME – (FD92) MACRO (KEY AD1) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (IC404 ul) (S701) (S701) (S702) (S704) (S706) (S711) 56 CONTROL RIGHT CONTROL LEFT CONTROL SET FLASH PROGRAM AE LCD BACK LIGHT OFF (KEY AD2) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (PK-54 board) (IC404 i;) (S701) (S701) (S701) (S705) (S707) (S709) 6. LED Check Page 2 Address 06 Data 02 Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 06, and set data: 02. 2) Check that all LED except for the ACCESS LED are lit. 3) Select page: 2, address: 06, and set data: 00. 7. Self Diagnosis Code Display Code Countermeasure Cause Caution Display During Error Change the disk and turn off the main C:32:01 Defective floppy disk. DRIVE ERROR power then back on. • The type of floppy disk that cannot be Replace the floppy disk or “Memory used by this machine, is inserted. Stick” (FD92). DISK ERROR (Such as 2DD) C:13:01 Format the floppy disk or “Memory MEMORY STICK ERROR • Data is damaged. Stick” (FD92) with the MVC-FD87/ (FD92) • Unformatted disk or “Memory Stick” FD92. (FD92) is inserted. Flash LED Checking of flash unit or replacement of Abnormality when flash is being E:91:01 *1 Flash display flash unit charged. Flashing at 3.2 Hz E:61:00 Checking of lens drive circuit When failed in the focus initialization. — E61:10 Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash, unit. *1: When the flash charging failed, Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 04 are written. After repair, be sure to write Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 00. [Power supplying Method] Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L10A) when supplying the power to this set. 55-4-499 E,

MVC-FD87/FD92 SECTION 6 REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are NOTE: critical for safety. • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may • The mechanical parts with no reference number in Replace only with part number speci- have some difference from the original one. the exploded views are not supplied. fied. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are • Accessories are given in the last of the electrical Les composants identifiés par une seldom required for routine service. Some delay parts list. marque 0 sont critiquens pour la should be anticipated when ordering these items. sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. 6-1-1. CABINET (FRONT) SECTION Cabinet (rear) section (See page 6-4.) FD92 16 10 12 2 14 MIC901 BT901 6 104210 2 10 2 FDD block section (See page 6-3.) Lens block section (See page 6-6 (FD87), 6-7 (FD92).) Cabinet (front) assembly J001 (See page 6-2.) Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 1 3-058-766-01 RETAINER, DC 11 3-058-764-01 HOLDER, MICROPHONE (FD92) 2 3-948-339-61 TAPPING * 12 3-058-797-01 CUSHION, MICROPHONE (FD92) 03 1-418-995-11 FLASH UNIT 13 3-058-765-21 COVER, MICROPHONE (FD92) * 4 3-058-801-01 SHEET, ST INSULATING * 14 3-061-228-01 RETAINER, HARNESS 5 A-7074-731-A FU-152 BOARD, COMPLETE 15 3-062-299-01 SHEET, MICROPHONE (FD92) 6 1-418-894-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL * 16 3-056-033-02 SHEET, FLEXIBLE RETAINER 7 3-058-742-01 HOLDER, SW BT901 1-694-297-21 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY 8 1-960-460-11 HARNESS (FU-051) J001 1-794-045-21 CONNECTOR, DC-IN 9 1-960-461-11 HARNESS (FU-052) MIC901 1-542-428-11 MICROPHONE UNIT (FD92) 10 3-968-729-91 SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2 6-1, 6-1-2. CABINET (FRONT) ASSEMBLY 64 62 51 63 64 FD87 61 58 65 60 64 59 66 52 56 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 51 X-3951-435-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY (FD87) 58 3-066-768-01 CAP, MICROPHONE (FD87) 51 X-3951-481-1 CABINET (FRONT) ASSY (FD92) 59 3-066-775-01 SPRING, BT PLATE 52 X-3951-436-1 LABEL ASSY, LENS (FD87) 60 3-066-772-01 PLATE, HINGE 52 X-3951-484-1 LABEL ASSY, LENS (FD92) 61 3-066-778-01 SPRING, BT TORSION 53 3-066-744-01 SCREW, FILTER 62 3-066-773-01 HOLDER, BATTERY 54 3-066-779-01 RING, ORNAMENTAL 63 3-969-380-01 SPRING, BATTERY 55 3-066-771-01 LID, BATTERY (FD87) 64 3-948-339-01 SCREW, TAPPING 55 3-066-771-11 LID, BATTERY (FD92) 65 3-066-774-01 SHAFT, HINGE 56 3-719-381-01 SCREW (M2X4) 66 3-052-574-01 CLAW, BT LOCK 57 3-058-767-11 COVER, DC (FD87) 67 3-058-755-01 SCREW, TRIPOD 57 3-058-767-21 COVER, DC (FD92) 68 3-713-791-41 SCREW (M1.7X5), TAPPING, P2 6-2, 6-1-3. FDD BLOCK SECTION FD92 FD87 109 104 CN201 (Note 1) 102 FD92 (Note 1) The FD block assembly is a mechanical unit which has completely been adjusted in the factory. So never disassemble the FD block assembly. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 101 1-772-563-11 DRIVE, FLOPPY DISK (Note 1) 106 A-7096-523-A FC-85 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (FD92) 102 3-066-799-01 BRACKET, USB (FD92) 107 1-677-898-11 FP-167 FLEXIBLE BOARD (FD92) 103 1-680-234-11 FP-335 FLEXIBLE BOARD (FD92) 107 1-677-903-11 FP-231 FLEXIBLE BOARD (FD87) 104 3-964-010-31 SCREW (M2), 0 PART-NO. P2 MAIN 108 3-066-806-01 SHEET, LIGHT INTERCEPTION (FD92) 105 3-066-780-01 BRACKET, FC 109 3-062-223-01 SHEET, BLIND (FD87) 106 A-7096-522-A FC-85 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) (FD87) CN201 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE (USB 5P) (FD92) 6-3, 6-1-4. CABINET (REAR) SECTION Cabinet (rear) assembly (See page 6-5.) BZ901 SP901 FD87 FD92 LCD901 (Note 2) ND801 (Note 2) @ 152 153 ! : BT701 (BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY) Board on the mount position. (See page 4-45.) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une (Note 2) About PK-54 board and LCD module, discriminate mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour lamark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. LCD type on the machine referring to page 7, and Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce replace the same type. ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 151 X-3951-433-1 CASE ASSY, PK SHIELD 158 3-066-764-01 SHEET (BUZZER), ADHESIVE (FD87) 152 1-677-897-11 FP-165 FLEXIBLE BOARD BZ901 1-529-739-11 BUZZER, PIEZOELECTRIC (FD87) 153 3-948-339-61 TAPPING LCD901 1-803-997-21 INDICATOR MODULE, LIQUID CRYSTAL 154 A-7074-732-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE SA) (FD87) (TYPE SA) (Note 2) (Note 2) LCD901 8-753-050-80 ACX307AKC-1 (TYPE ST) (Note 2) 154 A-7074-733-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE ST) (FD87) 0ND801 1-517-787-21 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE (Note 2) (TYPE ST) (FD92) (Note 2) 154 A-7074-743-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE SA) (FD92) 0ND801 1-517-787-31 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE (Note 2) (TYPE SA) (FD87) (Note 2) 154 A-7074-744-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE ST) (FD92) 0ND801 1-517-787-41 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE (Note 2) (TYPE SA) (FD92) (Note 2) 155 3-066-763-01 RETAINER (L), BL (FD87) 0ND801 1-517-787-51 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE 155 3-066-800-01 RETAINER, BACK LIGHT (FD92) (TYPE ST) (FD87) (Note 2) 156 3-052-592-01 WINDOW, LCD SP901 1-505-862-61 SPEAKER (2.0cm) (FD92) * 157 3-056-012-01 RETAINER (190), WINDOW 6-4, 6-1-5. CABINET (REAR) ASSEMBLY not 214 supplied FD92 210 212 215 208 FD92 217 209 not supplied (Note 3) 204 210 205 203 210 not supplied (Note 3) not FD92 201 supplied 216 (Note 3) The eject mechanism portion is a mechanical unit which has completely been adjusted in the factory. So never disassemble the eject mechanism portion. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 201 X-3951-434-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY (FD87) 210 3-948-339-61 TAPPING 201 X-3951-482-1 CABINET (REAR) ASSY (FD92) 211 3-058-770-01 SHEET METAL (R), STRAP 202 3-066-770-01 CABINET, SIDE 212 3-058-784-01 RETAINER, LOCK BUTTON 203 3-066-776-01 KNOB, FUNCTION (FD87) 213 3-066-753-01 KNOB, LOCK (FD87) 203 3-066-776-11 KNOB, FUNCTION (FD92) 213 3-066-753-11 KNOB, LOCK (FD92) 204 3-058-771-11 KNOB, POWER (FD87) 214 3-066-788-01 KNOB, EJECT (FD87) 204 3-058-771-21 KNOB, POWER (FD92) 214 3-066-788-11 KNOB, EJECT (FD92) 205 3-066-777-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION 215 3-058-785-01 SPRING, LOCK BUTTON 206 3-053-141-01 SPRING, POWER 216 3-066-802-01 COVER, USB JACK (FD92) 207 3-355-424-21 SCREW, TAPPING 217 3-066-766-01 LID (L), CPC (FD87) 208 3-066-794-01 LID, MS (FD92) 217 3-066-805-01 LID, CPC (FD92) 209 X-3951-485-1 MS HINGE ASSY (SERVICE) (FD92) 6-5, 6-1-6. LENS BLOCK SECTION (FD87) 253 253 256 252 254 IC201 (Note 4) M902 (Note 5) 251 M901 (Note 5) (Note 4) Be sure to read “Precuations for Replacement of CCD Imager” on page 4-10 when changing the CCD imager. (Note 5) Flexible board of video lens is not supplied. Please be careful not to break the flexible board when you change the motor unit. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 251 1-758-415-11 LENS, ZOOM (VCL-6103WA) 257 3-947-268-11 TITE (2), +B TAPPING (P) 252 3-066-769-01 FRAME (L), LENS 258 A-7074-729-A CD-318 BOARD, COMPLETE 253 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION * 259 3-061-627-01 SHEET (L), LENS 254 3-058-032-01 ADAPTOR (CL), CCD FITTING IC201 A-7031-090-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (Note 4) 255 1-758-435-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL M901 3-709-574-01 MOTOR UNIT, ZOOM (Note 5) 256 3-060-714-01 RUBBER (CL), SEAL M902 3-709-573-01 MOTOR UNIT, FOCUS (Note 5) 6-6, 6-1-7. LENS BLOCK SECTION (FD92) 302 303 M903 (Note 5) M901 (Note 5) IC101 (Note 4) M902 (Note 5) (Note 4) Be sure to read “Precuations for Replacement of CCD Imager” on page 4-8 when changing the CCD imager. (Note 5) Flexible board of video lens is not supplied. Please be careful not to break the flexible board when you change the motor unit. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 301 1-758-475-11 LENS, VIDEO (61JC) 308 A-7074-741-A CD-310 BOARD, COMPLETE 302 3-066-798-01 FRAME, LENS * 309 3-060-212-01 SHEET, LENS 303 3-948-339-61 TAPPING IC101 A-7031-083-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (Note 4) 304 3-963-467-11 ADAPTOR (FH), CCD FITTING M901 3-709-498-01 MOTOR, ZOOM STEPPING (Note 5) 305 1-758-322-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL M902 3-709-497-01 MOTOR, FOCUS STEPPING (Note 5) 306 3-968-054-11 RUBBER (FM), SHIELD M903 3-709-499-01 METER, ND (Note 5) 307 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING 6-7,

CD-310 CD-318

6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE: The components identified by • Due to standardization, replacements in the • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. parts list may be different from the parts speci- are seldom required for routine service. Replace only with part number fied in the diagrams or the components used Some delay should be anticipated when order- specified. on the set. ing these items. Les composants identifiés par une • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they • SEMICONDUCTORS marque 0 sont critiquens pour la may have some difference from the original In each case, u: µ, for example: sécurité. one. uA.: µA.uPA.: µPA.Ne les remplacer que par une pièce • RESISTORS uPB.: µPB.uPC.: µPC.portant le numéro spécifié. All resistors are in ohms. uPD.: µPD.METAL: Metal-film resistor. • CAPACITORS When indicating parts by reference METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. uF: µF number, please include the board. F: nonflammable • COILS uH: µH About PK-54 board and LCD module, dis- • Abbreviation criminate LCD type on the machine referring AUS : Australian model J : Japanese model to page 7, and replace the same type. CND : Canadian model JE : Tourist model HK : Hong Kong model KR : Korea model Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark A-7074-741-A CD-310 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD92) *********************** R112 1-216-296-11 SHORT 0 (Ref. No.: 2,000 Series) (IC101 is not included in this complete board) A-7074-729-A CD-318 BOARD, COMPLETE (FD87) < CAPACITOR > *********************** (Ref. No.: 2,000 Series) C101 1-113-985-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 20V (IC201 is not included in this complete board) C102 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C103 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < CAPACITOR > C104 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V C105 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C201 1-113-985-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 20V C202 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V C106 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C203 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C107 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C204 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V C108 1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 25V C205 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C109 1-162-915-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V C206 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V < CONNECTOR > C207 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C208 1-164-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 25V CN101 1-691-356-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 18P C209 1-162-915-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.5PF 50V < IC > < CONNECTOR > IC101 A-7031-083-A CCD BLOCK ASSY CN201 1-764-526-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 18P < COIL > < IC > L101 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH IC201 A-7031-083-A CCD BLOCK ASSY < TRANSISTOR > < COIL > Q101 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO L201 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH Q102 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 < TRANSISTOR > < RESISTOR > Q201 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO R101 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 Q202 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 R102 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R103 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W < RESISTOR > R104 1-218-936-11 RES-CHIP 39 5% 1/16W R105 1-218-936-11 RES-CHIP 39 5% 1/16W R201 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R202 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R106 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R203 1-216-813-11 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R107 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R204 1-218-936-11 RES-CHIP 39 5% 1/16W R108 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R205 1-216-804-11 METAL CHIP 39 5% 1/16W R109 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R110 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R206 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W (Note) Be sure to read “Note on the CCD Imager Replacement” on page 4-8, 4-10 when changing the CCD imager. 6-8,

CD-318

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R207 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R208 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R209 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R210 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R212 1-216-296-11 SHORT 0

Electrical parts list of the FC-85 board is not

shown.

Pages 6-10 to 6-18 are not shown.

6-9,

FU-152 PK-54 (TYPE SA)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark A-7074-731-A FU-152 BOARD, COMPLETE A-7074-732-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE SA) (FD87) ********************** A-7074-743-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE SA) (FD92) (Ref. No.: 2,000 Series) ****************************** (Ref. No.: 2,000 Series) < CAPACITOR > < BATTERY > C001 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V BT701 1-756-102-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY < CONNECTOR > < CAPACITOR > * CN001 1-580-056-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 3P * CN002 1-580-057-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (SMD) 4P C705 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V CN003 1-770-626-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 9P C706 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V CN004 1-770-629-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 12P C710 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V CN005 1-779-327-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P C711 1-164-870-11 CERAMIC CHIP 68PF 5% 16V C851 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < DIODE > C852 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V D001 8-719-158-49 DIODE MA8120-TX C853 1-165-128-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 16V D002 8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 C854 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V D003 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 C855 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V C856 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 16V < FUSE > C857 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V 0F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C858 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V 0F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C859 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 16V 0F003 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C861 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V 0F004 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C862 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V 0F005 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) C863 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V < FERRITE BEAD > C864 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V C865 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB001 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH 0C866 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV FB002 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH C901 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V FB003 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH C902 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V < LINE FILTER > C903 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C904 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE C905 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C906 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 16V < TRANSISTOR > C907 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V Q001 8-729-046-77 TRANSISTOR SI4963DY-T1 C908 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q002 8-729-804-41 TRANSISTOR 2SB1122-ST-TD C909 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q003 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO C910 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V Q004 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3) C911 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V Q005 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR SSM3K03FE(TPL3) C912 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V < RESISTOR > C913 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C914 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V R001 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W C917 1-107-686-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 16V R002 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W C918 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V R004 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R005 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W C920 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R006 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W C921 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C922 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R008 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W C923 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R019 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W C924 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R020 1-216-150-91 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/8W R021 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C925 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V C926 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V C927 1-164-868-11 CERAMIC CHIP 56PF 5% 16V C928 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V C932 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C933 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-19 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-54 (TYPE SA)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark < CONNECTOR > L903 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH L904 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH CN701 1-778-637-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 50P CN702 1-784-342-11 HOUSING, CONNECTOR 2P < TRANSISTOR > CN851 1-691-358-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 20P CN901 1-691-388-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 24P Q851 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J-(K8).SO Q852 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO < DIODE > Q853 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO Q854 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO D701 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1,SONY) (FLASH LED) Q855 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO D702 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002 (TPX1,SONY) (CHARGE LED) Q856 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102-TL D703 8-719-064-05 DIODE TLGU1002 (TPX1,SONY) Q857 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO (POWER LED) Q858 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO D782 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q859 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO D783 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q860 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR FP216-TL D784 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (FD92) Q861 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO D785 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (FD92) Q901 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO D786 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q902 8-729-046-75 TRANSISTOR SI2301DS-T1 D787 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q903 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE D788 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q904 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE D789 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q905 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE D790 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) D853 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 < RESISTOR > D904 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A R703 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 < FERRITE BEAD > R705 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R710 1-218-946-11 RES-CHIP 270 5% 1/16W FB781 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R712 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD87) FB782 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R713 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W FB783 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) FB784 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R714 1-208-912-11 METAL CHIP 11K 0.5% 1/16W FB785 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R715 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R716 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W FB786 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R717 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W FB787 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R718 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W FB788 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) FB789 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R719 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W FB790 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R720 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R721 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W FB791 1-414-234-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R722 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W FB901 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH R723 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W FB902 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH FB903 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH R724 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R725 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W < IC > R726 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R727 1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/10W IC702 8-759-572-54 IC TA6009FN(EL) R782 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W IC851 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR (FD92) IC852 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F-TE2 IC901 8-759-524-98 IC CXA8116R-T4 R787 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W IC902 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER (FD92) R853 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W IC903 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V(TE2) R854 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W IC904 8-759-677-84 IC LC12017-52T-TE-B R855 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W R856 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W < JACK > R857 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W J781 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AV OUT) (FD92) R858 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W J782 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC) (FD92) R859 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R860 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W < COIL > R861 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W L702 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH R862 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W L851 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH R863 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W L852 1-424-674-11 INDUCTOR 22uH R864 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W L853 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH R865 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W L901 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH R866 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W L902 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH R867 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W 6-20,

PK-54 (TYPE SA) PK-54 (TYPE ST)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R868 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R971 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R869 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R870 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R972 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R871 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R973 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R981 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R872 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R984 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R873 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W R985 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R876 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R901 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R987 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R902 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R988 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R996 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (Note) R903 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R904 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W < SWITCH > R905 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R906 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W S701 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (CONTROL BUTTON) R907 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W S702 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY) S703 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (POWER ON/OFF) R908 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W S704 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (+)) (FD92) R909 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W S705 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH) R910 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R911 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W S706 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (-)) (FD92) R913 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W S707 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (PROGRAM AE) S708 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (PLAY) R914 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W S709 1-762-741-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (LCD BACK LIGHT) R915 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S710 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (MOVIE) (FD92) R916 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R917 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S711 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FOCUS) R920 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W < SENSOR > R921 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R923 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W SE701 1-801-868-41 SENSOR, SHOCK R924 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R925 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W < TRANSFORMER > R926 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W 0T851 1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER R927 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R928 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R929 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W A-7074-733-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE ST) (FD87) R930 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W A-7074-744-A PK-54 BOARD, COMPLETE (TYPE ST) (FD92) R931 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W ****************************** (Ref. No.: 2,000 Series) R932 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R933 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W < BATTERY > R936 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W R937 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W BT701 1-756-102-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY R938 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W < CAPACITOR > R939 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R940 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W C705 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V R942 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C706 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V R944 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W C710 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V R945 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W C711 1-164-870-11 CERAMIC CHIP 68PF 5% 16V C851 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R947 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R948 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W C852 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V R949 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W C853 1-165-128-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 16V R950 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W C854 1-135-149-21 TANTALUM CHIP 2.2uF 20% 10V R951 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W C855 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V C856 1-164-856-81 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 16V R953 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R955 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C857 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V R956 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W C858 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V R957 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W C859 1-164-860-11 CERAMIC CHIP 27PF 5% 16V R959 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C861 1-113-682-11 TANTAL. CHIP 33uF 20% 10V C862 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V R967 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R968 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C863 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V R969 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C864 1-164-657-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 50V R970 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 C865 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la Note: R996 is mounted on the board with suffix mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité.Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce number 12. 6-21 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-54 (TYPE ST)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 0C866 1-131-959-91 CERAMIC CHIP 12PF 10% 3KV FB783 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) C901 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V FB784 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) FB785 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) C902 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C903 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB786 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) C904 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB787 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) C905 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V FB788 1-414-228-11 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) C907 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V FB789 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) FB790 1-500-284-21 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) C908 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C909 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V FB791 1-414-234-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) C910 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V FB901 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C911 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V FB902 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C912 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V FB903 1-414-229-11 FERRITE 0uH C913 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V < IC > C914 1-125-838-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C917 1-107-686-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 16V IC702 8-759-572-54 IC TA6009FN(EL) C918 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V IC851 8-759-521-35 IC TL5001CDR C920 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC852 8-759-710-82 IC NJM2406F-TE2 IC901 8-759-524-98 IC CXA8116R-T4 C921 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V IC902 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER C922 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C923 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V IC903 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V(TE2) C924 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V IC904 8-752-405-01 IC CXD3510R-T4 C925 1-127-760-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V < JACK > C926 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V C927 1-164-868-11 CERAMIC CHIP 56PF 5% 16V J781 1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AV OUT) (FD92) C928 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V J782 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC) (FD92) C929 1-164-489-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 16V C931 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V < COIL > C932 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V L702 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH C933 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 16V L851 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH L852 1-424-674-11 INDUCTOR 22uH < CONNECTOR > L853 1-419-387-21 INDUCTOR 100uH L901 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 10uH CN701 1-778-637-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 50P CN702 1-784-342-11 HOUSING, CONNECTOR 2P L902 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH CN851 1-691-358-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 20P L903 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH CN901 1-691-388-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 24P L904 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH < DIODE > < TRANSISTOR > D701 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY) (FLASH LED) Q851 8-729-042-72 TRANSISTOR UN9214J-(K8).SO D702 8-719-061-81 DIODE TLYU1002(TPX1,SONY) Q852 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO (CHARGE LED) Q853 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO D703 8-719-064-05 DIODE TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY) Q854 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO (POWER LED) Q855 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO D782 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) D783 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q856 8-729-823-84 TRANSISTOR FP102-TL Q857 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO D784 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (FD92) Q858 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO D785 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 (FD92) Q859 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J-(K8).SO D786 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q860 8-729-039-43 TRANSISTOR FP216-TL D787 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) D788 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q861 8-729-042-59 TRANSISTOR UN9112J-(K8).SO Q903 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE D789 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q904 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE D790 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 (FD92) Q905 8-729-427-74 TRANSISTOR XP4601-TXE D853 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 Q908 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SA1832F-Y/GR(TPL3) D904 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A D906 8-719-050-42 DIODE RD3.3UM-T1B < RESISTOR > < FERRITE BEAD > R703 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R705 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W FB781 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R710 1-218-946-11 RES-CHIP 270 5% 1/16W FB782 1-414-633-22 FERRITE 0uH (FD92) R712 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (FD87) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 6-22 ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

PK-54 (TYPE ST)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R713 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R924 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R714 1-208-912-11 METAL CHIP 11K 0.5% 1/16W R925 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R715 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R926 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R716 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R927 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R717 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R928 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R718 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R929 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R719 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R930 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R720 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R931 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R721 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R932 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R722 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R933 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R723 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R936 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W R724 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R937 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R725 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R938 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R726 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R939 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R727 1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/10W R940 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R782 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W (FD92) R943 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R944 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R787 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R945 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W (FD92) R947 1-218-983-11 RES-CHIP 330K 5% 1/16W R853 1-208-703-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 0.5% 1/16W R948 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R854 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R855 1-218-978-11 METAL CHIP 120K 0.5% 1/16W R949 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R856 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W R950 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R951 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R857 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R953 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R858 1-218-950-11 RES-CHIP 560 5% 1/16W R955 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R859 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R860 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R956 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R861 1-208-689-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W R957 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R958 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R862 1-208-695-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 0.5% 1/16W R960 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R863 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R961 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R864 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R865 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R965 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R866 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R966 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R974 1-218-979-11 RES-CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R867 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R975 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R868 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R976 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R869 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R870 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R977 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W R871 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R979 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R980 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R872 1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R984 1-208-939-11 METAL CHIP 150K 0.5% 1/16W R873 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W R985 1-208-939-11 METAL CHIP 150K 0.5% 1/16W R876 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R902 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R987 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R905 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R988 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R996 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 (Note) R906 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R907 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W < SWITCH > R908 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R909 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W S701 1-786-039-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (CONTROL BUTTON) R910 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W S702 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (DISPLAY) S703 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (POWER ON/OFF) R911 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W S704 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (+)) (FD92) R912 1-216-295-11 SHORT 0 S705 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH) R913 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R914 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W S706 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (VOLUME (-)) (FD92) R915 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S707 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (PROGRAME AE) S708 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (PLAY) R916 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W S709 1-762-741-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (LCD BACK LIGHT) R917 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W S710 1-572-467-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (MOVIE) (FD92) R920 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W R921 1-218-976-11 RES-CHIP 82K 5% 1/16W S711 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FOCUS) R923 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W Note: R996 is mounted on the board with suffix number 12. 6-23,

PK-54 (TYPE ST)

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark < SENSOR > 3-066-742-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) (FD92: US, CND, AEP, UK, E, HK, AUS) SE701 1-801-868-41 SENSOR, SHOCK 3-066-742-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN) (FD92: CND, AEP) < TRANSFORMER > 3-066-742-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH, PORTUGUESE) (FD92: AEP, E) 0T851 1-435-227-11 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER 3-066-742-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN, DUTCH) (FD92: AEP) 3-066-742-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL ACCESSORIES CHINESE, SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) ************ (FD92: E, HK) 0 1-475-599-11 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10) (EXCEPT KR) 3-066-742-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION 0 1-475-599-71 ADAPTOR, AC (AC-L10) (KR) (SWEDISH, RUSSIAN) (FD92: AEP) 0 1-569-007-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E) 3-066-742-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (FD92: E) 0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E) 3-066-742-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN) 0 1-696-819-11 CORD, POWER (AUS) (FD92: KR) 3-067-797-01 STRING (T), CAP 1-757-293-11 CORD, CONNECTION (USB 5P) (FD92) 3-987-015-01 BELT (S), SHOULDER 0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (AEP, E) 0 1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (KR) 0 A-7094-140-A BATTERY PACK (NP-F330) (US, CND) 0 1-783-374-11 CORD, POWER (UK, HK) 0 A-7094-141-B BATTERY PACK (NP-F330) 1-783-738-11 CORD, CONNECTION (AV CONNECTING 1.5m) (EXCEPT US, CND, J) (FD92) X-3950-660-1 CAP ASSY, LENS 0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (US, CND) 0 1-790-732-11 CORD, POWER (J) 3-065-665-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (for SAFETY) (JAPANESE) (J) 3-066-676-01 SPVD-004 (P) (CD-ROM) (EXCEPT US, CND, J) 3-066-677-01 SPVD-004 (I) (CD-ROM) (US, CND, J) 3-066-741-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE) (FD87: J) 3-066-741-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) (FD87: US, CND, AEP, UK, E, HK, AUS) 3-066-741-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN) (FD87: CND, AEP) 3-066-741-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH, PORTUGUESE) (FD87: AEP, E) 3-066-741-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN, DUTCH) (FD87: AEP) 3-066-741-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE, SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (FD87: E, HK) 3-066-741-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH, RUSSIAN) (FD87: AEP) 3-066-741-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (FD87: E) 3-066-741-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN) (FD87: KR) 3-066-742-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE) (FD92: J) The components identified by Les composants identifiés par une mark 0 or dotted line with marque 0 sont critiques pour la mark 0 are critical for safety. sécurité. Replace only with part num- Ne les remplacer que par une pièce 66-2-244 E ber specified. portant le numéro spécifié.,

MVC-FD87/FD92 Sony EMCS Co. Kohda TEC 2001F0500-19-929-871-32 © 2001. 6

– 138 – Published by PV Customer Center,

Reverse 992987132.pdf Revision History

S.M. Rev. Ver. Date History Contents issued 1.0 2001.02 Official Release — — 1.1 2001.06 Correction S.M. correction: Page 5-30, Page 5-32, Yes Page 5-44]
15

Similar documents

AVR055: Using a 32kHz XTAL for run-time calibration of the internal RC
AVR055: Using a 32kHz XTAL for run-time calibration of the internal RC Features • Calibration using a 32 kHz external crystal • Adjustable RC frequency with maximum +/-2% accuracy • Tune RC oscillator at any operating voltage and temperature • Tune RC oscillator to any frequency within specification
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1981A–AVR–03/05 AVR155: Accessing an I2C LCD Display using the AVR® 2-wire Serial Interface Features • Compatible with Philips' I2C protocol • 2-wire Serial Interface Master Driver for Easy Transmit and Receive Function • Initialization and Use ofa2x1
AVR107: Interfacing AVR serial memories
AVR107: Interfacing AVR serial memories Features • Devices: AT25128A/256A, AT25F1024/2048/4096 • Full Serial Memory Functions Support • Memory Array Burst Read • Page Burst Write • Write Protection Detection • On Going Access Detection • Non-blocking Write Access • Access Status Information 1 Introd
AVR120: Characterization and Calibration of the ADC on an AVR
AVR120: Characterization and Calibration of the ADC on an AVR Features • Understanding Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) characteristics • Measuring parameters describing ADC characteristics • Temperature, frequency and supply voltage dependencies • Compensating for offset and gain error Introductio
AVR001 Conditional Assembly and portability macros
AVR001 Conditional Assembly and portability macros Features • Increased portability • Easier Code Writing • Simplified I/O Register Access • Improved Assembly Status Feedback 1 Introduction This application note describes the Conditional Assembly feature present in the AVR Assembler version 1.74 and
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2527A–AVR–9/02 AVR223: Digital Filters with AVR Features • Implementations of Simple Digital Filters • Coefficient and Data Scaling • Fast Implementation of 2nd Order FIR Filter • Compact Implementation Of 8th Order FIR Filter • Fast Implementation of 2nd
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR040: EMC Design Considerations Scope
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1619C–AVR–01/04 AVR040: EMC Design Considerations Scope This application note covers the most common EMC problems designers encounter when using microcontrollers. It will briefly discuss the various phenomena. The refer- ence literature covers EMC design i
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2508B–AVR–01/04 AVR182: Zero Cross Detector Features • Interrupt Driven • Modular C Source Code • Size Efficient Code • Accurate and Fast Detection • A Minimum of External Components Introduction One of the many issues with developing modern applicati
AVR242: 8-bit Microcontroller Multiplexing LED Drive anda4x4Keypad Multiplexing Features reduced to fifteen with a bit of ingenuity,
AVR242: 8-bit Microcontroller Multiplexing LED Drive anda4x4Keypad Multiplexing Features reduced to fifteen with a bit of ingenuity, allowing the smaller 20-pin AVR to be LED Drive and a • 16 Key Pushbutton Pad in4x4Matrix • 4 Digit Multiplexed LED Display with used. The circuit diagram is shown in
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR180: External Brown-out Protection
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1051B–AVR–05/02 AVR180: External Brown-out Protection Features • Low-voltage Detector • Prevent Register and EEPROM Corruption • Two Discrete Solutions • Integrated IC Solution • Extreme Low-cost Solution • Extreme Low-power Solution • Formulas for Compone
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1259D–AVR–04/05 AVR134: Real Time Clock (RTC) using the Asynchronous Timer Features • Real Time Clock with Very Low Power Consumption (4 µA @ 3.3V) • Very Low Cost Solution • Adjustable Prescaler to Adjust Precision • Counts Time, Date, Month, and Year wit
  Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram Samsung Electronics 6-1
8-bit Microcntroller Application Note
8-bit Microcntroller Application Note Rev. 2532A–AVR–01/03 AVR243: Matrix Keyboard Decoder Features • 64-key Push-button Keyboard in8x8Matrix • No External Components Required • Wakes Up from Sleep Mode on Keypress • Easily Implemented into Other Applications • Low Power Consumption • Software Conta
  Alignment and Adjustments
Alignment and Adjustments 1. Tuner FM THD Adjustment FMOutput Antenna GND SETSSG FREQ. 98 MHz Terminal Oscilloscope Adjustment FM S.S.G Input point FM DETECTOR COIL Speaker (FM DET) Terminal output Input Output 60 dB Distortion Meter Minumum Distortion (0.4% below) (Figure 1-1) Figure1-1 IF CENTER
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2540A–AVR–07/03 AVR104: Buffered Interrupt Controlled EEPROM Writes Features • Flexible Multi-byte EEPROM Buffer • Power Efficient EEPROM Access • Access Control on Buffers • EEPROM Buffer Rewrite Introduction Many applications use the built-in EEPROM of t
  Schematic Diagram - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization -
Schematic Diagram - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization - 7-1 MAIN 7-1 Samsung Electronics 7-2 FRONT - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization - Samsung Electronics 7-2 7-3 DSP - This Document can not be used without Samsung’s authorization - 7-3 Sam
  TroubleShooting
TroubleShooting 9-1 Main 9-1 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-2 9-3 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-4 9-2 DVD Servo parts 9-5 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-6 9-7 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-8 9-9 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 9-10 9-11 Samsung
AVR054: Run-time calibration of the internal RC oscillator
AVR054: Run-time calibration of the internal RC oscillator Features • Calibration of internal RC oscillator via UART • LIN 2.0 compatible synchronization/calibration to within +/-2% of target frequency • Alternate run-time synchronization/calibration to within +/-1% of target frequency • Support for
SERVICE Manual
DVD RECEIVER AMP HT-DB120 SERVICE Manual DVD RECEIVER AMP SYSTEM CONTENTS 1. Alignment and Adjustments 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Electrical Parts List 4. Block Diagrams 5. PCB Diagrams 6. Wiring Diagram 7. Schematic Diagrams 8. IC block Diagrams 9.Troubleshooting - Confidential - ELECTRONI
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR131: Using the AVR’s High-speed PWM
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2542A–AVR–09/03 AVR131: Using the AVR’s High-speed PWM Features • Analog Waveform Generation using PWM • High-speed Prescalable PWM Clock Introduction This application note is an introduction to the use of the high-speed Pulse Width Mod- ulator (PWM) avail
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note AVR042: AVR® Hardware Design Considerations
8-bit RISC Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2521B–AVR–01/04 AVR042: AVR® Hardware Design Considerations Features • Providing Robust Supply Voltage, Digital and Analog • Connecting the RESET Line • SPI Interface for In-System Programming • Using External Crystal or Ceramic Resonator Oscillators
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR240: 4x4Keypad – Wake-up on Keypress Features Introduction
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR240: 4x4Keypad – Wake-up on Keypress Features • 16 Key Pushbutton Pad in4x4Matrix • Very Low Power Consumption • AVR in Sleep Mode and Wakes Up on Keypress • Minimum External Components • ESD Protection Included if Necessary • Efficient Code • Complete Progr
Microcontrollers for Fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts SMARTER, MORE FLEXIBLE LIGHTING SOLUTIONS
LIGHTINGMICROCONTROLLERSMicrocontrollers for Fluorescent and High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts SMARTER, MORE FLEXIBLE LIGHTING SOLUTIONS Developed together with the industry leading lamp ballast manufac- turers, Atmel® microcontrollers are optimized for Linear and Dimmable Fluorescent tubes, as
AVR121: Enhancing ADC resolution by oversampling
AVR121: Enhancing ADC resolution by oversampling Features • Increasing the resolution by oversampling • Averaging and decimation • Noise reduction by averaging samples 1 Introduction Atmel’s AVR controller offers an Analog to Digital Converter with 10-bit resolution. In most cases 10-bit resolution
  IC Block Diagrams 8-1 Main
IC Block Diagrams 8-1 Main 8-1-1. FAN8082D 8-1 Samsung Electronics 8-1-2. LC87F66C8A Samsung Electronics 8-2 8-3 Samsung Electronics Samsung Electronics 8-4 8-5 Samsung Electronics 8-1-3. M62446AFP Samsung Electronics 8-6 8-7 Samsung Electronics 8-1-4. M66010FP 8-1-5. SI-8050SE 8-1-6. SI-8090JFE S
AVR053: Calibration of the internal RC oscillator Features Introduction
AVR053: Calibration of the internal RC oscillator Features • Calibration using STK500, AVRISP, JTAGICE or JTAGICE mkII • Calibration using 3rd party programmers • Adjustable RC frequency with +/-1% accuracy • Tune RC oscillator at any operating voltage and temperature • Tune RC oscillator to any fre
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR230: DES Bootloader Features
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 2541D–AVR–04/05 AVR230: DES Bootloader Features • Fits All AVR Microcontrollers with Bootloader Capabilities • Enables Secure Transfer of Compiled Software or Sensitive Data to Any AVR with Bootloader Capabilities • Includes Easy To Use, Configurable Examp
AVR106: C functions for reading and writing to Flash memory
AVR106: C functions for reading and writing to Flash memory Features • C functions for accessing Flash memory - Byte read - Page read - Byte write - Page write • Optional recovery on power failure • Functions can be used with any device having Self programming Program memory • Example project for us
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note AVR201: Using the AVR® Hardware Multiplier
8-bit Microcontroller Application Note Rev. 1631C–AVR–06/02 AVR201: Using the AVR® Hardware Multiplier Features • 8- and 16-bit Implementations • Signed and Unsigned Routines • Fractional Signed and Unsigned Multiply • Executable Example Programs Introduction The megaAVR is a series of new devices i
  Printed Circuit Board Diagram
Printed Circuit Board Diagram 5-1 MAIN 5-1 Samsung Electronics 5-2 FRONT Samsung Electronics 5-2 5-3 DSP 5-3 Samsung Electronics 5-4 JACK * RCA JACK * SCART JACK Samsung Electronics 5-4 5-5 DVD PACK * TOP VIEW * BOTTOM VIEW 5-5 Samsung Electronics